JP6717868B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

As such a gaming machine, a predetermined game such as a round game in which a variable winning means such as a special variable winning ball device is controlled from a closed state to an open state can be executed a predetermined number of times during a big hit game state as an advantageous state. There was something. Then, in such a gaming machine, during a predetermined game, a specific display such as a count object capable of specifying the number of game media (gaming balls) that can be won until the variable winning means changes from the open state to the closed state. There was a thing (patent document 1).

JP, 2017-108897, A (paragraph 0277 grade).

However, in the gaming machine described above, the specific display that can specify the number of game media that can be won during the round game as the predetermined game is only an effect that is erased each time the game medium wins, There was a problem that the entertainment related to the game was lacking in fun and the interest in the game was not improved.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of the effect regarding a predetermined game and enhancing the interest of the game.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
A first state game media capable ingress (open state or the like), game media changeable variable Hente stage and entering non-cacheable second state (closed state or the like) and (the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) ,
In the preferred state, the friendly Hente predetermined number of times a predetermined game (round game, etc.) which control stage from the second state to the first state (15R or 5R, etc.) executable soluble Hente stage (for game control Microcomputer 100, S116, S117, etc. in FIG. 5),
The friendly Hente stage, winning display of the predetermined number of the specific image in a first state to allow identifying the number number of game media that enables entering until the second state (Figure 10-1 box image 271F003 etc.) can be displayed specific image display means (effect control CPU 120, provided with a S176, etc.) in FIG. 7,
The specific image display means,
Displaying the predetermined number of specific images when the variable means is in the first state, and maintaining the display of the predetermined number of specific images until the variable means is in the second state,
When a predetermined number or less of the game media enter the variable means, the display mode of one specific image of the predetermined number of the specific images already displayed is changed to the specific mode every time the game medium enters. Let me display
When the number of game media entering the variable means exceeds the predetermined number, a specific effect is executed by using all of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode, and then the specific mode is changed to the specific mode. End the display of the predetermined number of changed specific images,
When the number of game media entering the variable means does not exceed the predetermined number, the display of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode is ended without executing the specific effect.

According to such a configuration, since there are abundant variations of the effects related to the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to the predetermined game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1 ) above,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player,
Further comprising a setting suggestion production means capable of executing a setting suggestion production for suggesting the setting of the set value,
The setting suggestion producing means is responsive to the fact that the number of game media entering the changing means exceeds the predetermined number before the changing means is in the first state and is in the second state. A setting suggestion effect can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since there are abundant variations of the effects related to the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the fun of the effects related to the predetermined game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Obtainable count display (Dedama number that can specify the number of (obtainable number of jackpot by type defined exiting sphere etc.) of obtainable gaming media by ingress of game media to the friendly Hente stage in the preferred state Further, an obtainable number display means (e.g., CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the obtainable number display indicated by the denominator of the image 271F002),
The obtainable number display means does not change the obtainable number display when more game media than the predetermined number have entered (even if an over-win is generated, FIG. 10-1(C), FIG. 10-2). (As in (C), the obtainable number display indicated by the denominator in the fractional format in the number-of-balls image 271F002 is fixedly displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if more than a predetermined number of game media enter , the display of the number of possible acquisitions does not change, but a predetermined number of game media enters and more than a predetermined number of game media enter. When the display of the specific image is terminated in a different manner, or the display of the specific image is terminated after executing a different effect, the obtainable number display does not change for the player. You can avoid giving distrust.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific image display means, game media changing the display mode of the specific image based on entering in the Allowed Hente stage (Fig. 10-1 (B), as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B) (Each time a game ball wins the big winning opening, a prize notification effect is produced in which the prize display box image 271F003 is changed to a display mode in which the lid opens to release the star-shaped image 271F004).

According to such a configuration, since there are many variations of effects related to the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific image display means changes the display termination mode of the specific image according to the number of times the game medium more than the predetermined number has entered in the variable means ([[win prize display box image display depending on the number of over-wins Example of different end modes], for example, in the final round according to the total number of over-winning numbers in all rounds, the ending mode of displaying the prize display box image 271F003 is different depending on the number of over-winning prizes in each round. The manner of ending the display of the winning display box image 271F003 is different).

According to such a configuration, since there are many variations of effects related to the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The advantageous state is an advantageous state selected from a plurality of types of the advantageous states (15R big hit, 5R big hit, etc.),
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific image according to the type of the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 10-3, as the image type of the winning display box image 271F003, a treasure box shape in the case of a 15R big hit) Image, and in the case of 5R big hit, select the image in the shape of a paper box).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode of the specific image varies depending on the type of jackpot, a variety of effects regarding the predetermined game can be abundant, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. which concern on another characteristic part. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to another feature. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|generation control command which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the game random number which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit classification determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game controls which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of the display monitor and the display content which concern on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the storage area which memorize|stores the number of prize balls which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the example of control of the display in the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for game machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the state control example which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning other feature parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing in the modification concerning other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ongoing setting confirmation process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the notification which concerns on 71 AK of characteristics. It is a figure which shows the example of a display concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the time of starting concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output change process in progress which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power activation in the modification concerning the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production control pattern concerning a characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the confirmation production control processing concerning the characteristic part 74AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production concerning the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of confirmation production control processing during a change concerning a characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the special effect which concerns on the characteristic part 229F. It is a figure which shows the interval period setting suggestion production determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 229F in a table format. It is the flowchart which shows the big hit start production setting processing which relates to the feature section 229F. It is a flow chart which shows interval production setting processing concerning a characteristic part 229F. It is a figure which shows the interval period setting suggestion production determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 230F in a table format. FIG. 28 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the effect of suggesting over-winning prize setting related to the characteristic portion 231F. It is a figure showing the over-prize setting suggestion production decision table concerning the characteristic part 231F in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process which concerns on the characteristic part 231F. It is a flowchart showing an over-winning process according to the characteristic portion 231F. FIG. 32 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing a production example of the acquisition number setting suggestion production relating to the characteristic portion 232F. It is a figure which shows the acquisition number setting suggestion production determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 232F in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition number notification process which concerns on the characteristic part 232F. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of V winning setting suggesting effect related to the characteristic portion 233F. It is a figure which shows the V winning setting suggestion production determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 233F in a table format. It is a flow chart which shows V winning notification processing concerning a characteristic part 233F. It is a display screen diagram of the image display device showing a first effect example of the winning number identification display in the jackpot gaming state related to the characteristic portion 271F. It is a display screen diagram of the image display device showing a second effect example of the winning number identification display in the jackpot gaming state related to the characteristic portion 271F. It is a figure showing a prize display box selection table classified by big hit type in a tabular form.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (eg, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of ordinary figure hold numbers.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted as described above is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when the "big hit" is set Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening pretreatment is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing for opening the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 may be stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern by the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect effect processing during the variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect processing during small hit in step S174 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command designating to end the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the CPU 120 for production control sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the contents of the production in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, so that the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes the case where one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the configuration related to other features)
Next, other characteristic parts in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This characteristic part can execute control of an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration for changing the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation, and a setting. It is provided with a configuration for making it possible to confirm the set value being displayed. Then, the set value that is set can be displayed by the configuration that can display the information about the game value such as the prize ball that is given based on the game medium such as the game ball entering the predetermined area.

FIG. 8-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this feature. The same components as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. The case where the display result is “out” (Hiragana) is the same as the case where the display result is “Loss” (Katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any of the plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

The effect control board 12 is connected to operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member that is a movable accessory (movable effect device) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. .. The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor. The production control board 12 is provided with a real time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

In this embodiment (embodiment), when the small hitting game state is controlled, the second special winning opening, which is the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, is provided separately from the first special winning opening. The special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the second big winning opening is opened until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. State. In the present embodiment, the second special winning opening is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hitting game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state. The second special winning opening is opened by the second special winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is on, and the game ball passes (enters) through the second special winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is off, the second special winning opening is closed by the second special winning opening door, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening ( Entry) In this way, the second special winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the second special winning opening is provided. May be.

The count switch 23 serves as a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first special winning opening. The game ball passing (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through the second count switch installed in the second special winning opening. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second big winning opening which has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when you did. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball into the second special winning opening to obtain the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

Inside the second special winning opening, a third count switch and a fourth count switch through which game balls can pass are installed. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game, the game state after the small hit game is finished is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, while the second big winning opening door is open during the small hitting game, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration and the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since it is possible for fraud to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case.

Inside the second special winning opening, a regulating member for regulating and allowing the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state that restricts the downward flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and an allowable state that allows the downward flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. Has been.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch, it is not a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the second special winning opening door has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number ( The second special winning opening is opened in the period until the generation of 10 winning balls. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special winning opening is in the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second special winning opening is controlled to the first state. It is not limited to this, and the first special winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15" or "5"). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball is not won in the second special winning opening). Good.

FIG. 8-2 is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17, etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and also has a function of displaying various winning information on winning on the display monitor 29. A display changeover switch 300 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 300.

On the main board 11, a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of a glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a special winning opening for detecting the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) is also provided based on detection signals output from these sensors. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main board 11, and a display monitor 29 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 29. A display changeover switch 300 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 300 are arranged on the front side when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (first big winning opening, second big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area". (Also referred to as “”), the number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the consecutive ratio and the winning combination is displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. By doing so, various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall can be confirmed. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the gaming board surface is designed so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when performing the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been made, what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, the game balls enter the general winning opening as often as designed. Is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment and the contents after the installation.

The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply electric power from an AC power supply (AC100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 is provided which functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit in the changed state. Further, the power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power supply switch AK002.

The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires a key operation, only the staff having a key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff in the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key and also an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation.

When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on/off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is performed. There is a case to be seen. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches simultaneously with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be arranged at positions that can be simultaneously operated by an attendant of the game hall or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as an on/off switching operation and a pressing operation by an attendant of the game arcade, etc., in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

In the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, nozzles (discharging ports) are provided for discharging gaming balls that have won a prize or game balls that have entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, inside the nozzle. The outlet switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided. The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

The command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is “out”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result), or when the variable display result is “big hit” Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) which one of the plurality of types of the jackpot type is selected.

The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command which notifies the advance determination result that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small hit B".

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating variable stop (decision) of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been cleared along with the initialization in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by turning on the power. Is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that specifies the start of a setting change state in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by turning on the power. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the set value consists of three levels, 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2". However, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to “3”. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H in which the EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be designated by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. The setting value designation command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted, for example, when the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is transmitted. May be transmitted. Further, for example, every time the fluctuation display is performed ten times in the special figure game, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the fluctuation display being executed a predetermined number of times. Instead of these, or in addition to these, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo designation command.

The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command that specifies the start of a setting confirmation state that enables confirmation of the set value when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by turning on the power. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the effect control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designating command for designating the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demonstration screen display) by displaying the effect image corresponding to the stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open designation command for designating a period during which the special winning opening is open in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command after opening the special winning opening for designating a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and the start winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on the second special symbol display 4B, it is a second starting opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

The command D100H is a V winning notification designating command for notifying that the third counting switch is turned on by the game ball passing through the third counting switch, that is, the V winning is won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the control CPU 120 for effect control may execute control for executing the V winning notification effect for notifying that the V winning has been won based on the reception of the V winning notification designation command. In the V winning notification production, different production patterns may be determined according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the determination ratio of a plurality of production patterns may be different. In this way, the set value may be suggested by the presentation mode of the V winning notification presentation. For example, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode of the V winning notification effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise. May be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which the display color of the effect image indicating “V” is different may be included. Then, along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command, the setting value designation command may be transmitted. Thereby, when the V winning notification effect is executed, it is possible to appropriately determine the effect mode according to the set value.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value that is a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the general figure display result are determined. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

In the present embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR5 are used as the values in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each of the random number values MR1 to MR5. May be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. Below, the variation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as a reach variation pattern. Further, a variation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A variation pattern may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1), a display result determination table (setting value 2), a display result determination table (setting value 3), a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), a jackpot type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, 1 being the highest payout rate, the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special map designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is the subject of variable display, the set value is " It is possible to win big hits with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of “2” and “3” and set some of these judgment values as judgment values corresponding to small hits. The small hits are won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. The judgment value is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. Along with winning, the half of these determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a higher probability (100/200). ) To win the small hit.

FIG. 8-6(B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, when the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the setting value is “1”. While winning, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so there is a lower probability (1/99) than when the setting value is "1" It is supposed to win. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. The judgment value is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. Along with winning, the half of these determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

FIG. 8-6(C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is If not set, therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, with a lower probability (1/200) than when the set value is "1" or "2", it is a big hit. You win, but you won't win the small win (probability of winning: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. The judgment value is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display Along with winning, the half of these determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and , And the set value is “1” or “2”, the small win is won with the same probability (100/200).

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit A ~ It decides to be a jackpot C). Moreover, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control the big hit game state, but the big hit symbol the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. In this way, since the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is different depending on the set value, if the set value is changed, one setting is made in a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to other settings.

In the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probability of small hits is the same when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, but the small hits are set in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be lowered. On the other hand, when the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is set to be lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the variation special figure designation buffer is the same as the second case. In addition, all the set values may have the same winning probability.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result judgment table. However, the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are separately provided, and the big hit The determination is made by using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special diagram designation buffer, and the determination of the small hit is made. You may make it use a separate table for the case where the variation special figure designation|designated buffer is the 1st, and when it is the 2nd.

In the present embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, the determination values other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit are determined as the determination values corresponding to the small hit. It is not set, that is, the small hit is not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit is won You may That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The setting value that can be set to 2 may be 2 or 4 or more (for example, 6). Further, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the one where the smaller the set value, the higher the advantage to the player, and the larger the set value, the higher the advantage to the player. Good. For example, when the set value consists of 6 levels, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, the higher the payout rate is, and 6 is It may be the one with the highest payout rate. Thus, the larger the value, the lower the advantage for the player when 1 is set and the highest advantage for the player when 6 is set. The advantage may be gradually increased.

FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Referenced to determine. The small hit type determination table is a small hit type A or small hit B based on a random number (MR2) for determining a small hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. Referenced to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit A small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit type D big hit game is executed. Is becoming Also, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit B small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit type E big hit game is executed. .. These big hits D and big hits E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the hit type extracted at the time of winning the start prize, and the game ball is the first in the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. It is a jackpot type that is determined by whether or not a 3-count switch has been passed.

FIG. 8-7(A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). Big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed), the big hit type Referenced when making a decision.

FIG. 8-7(B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). Big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed), the big hit type Referenced when making a decision.

FIG. 8-7(C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when the small hit type is determined regardless of whether the game ball is the pending storage based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. ..

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing types of jackpots in this embodiment. In this embodiment, as the big hit type, there are big hit A and big hit D for which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state, and big hit B, big hit C and big hit E for which the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state. It is set. Of these jackpots A to jackpots E, jackpot C and jackpot E are the jackpots most advantageous to the player, and jackpots A and D are the jackpots most disadvantageous to the player. Since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a smaller hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

Of these big hits A to big hits E, the big hit A is a big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of big hit A ends, time saving control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. After the jackpot B big hit game state ends, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again before the special figure game is executed 20 times. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the first big winning opening is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot C big hit game state ends, the time saving control is executed until the special hit game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again before the special hit game is executed 100 times. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of big hit D ends, time saving control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state that is advantageous to the player. After the jackpot E is in the jackpot game state, the time saving control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed, or until a big hit occurs again before 100 special figure games are executed.

Although the big hit D and the big hit E have the big winning opening to be opened as the second big winning opening, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit opening of the big hit D and the big hit E is to be opened. , The first big winning opening may be used. That is, for the small hit game, the second big winning opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game, instead of the second big winning opening as the big hit game, Just open the big prize hole.

In the time saving state, the probability of being a "universal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the V winning of the game ball during the small hit game, so the big hit game state is normal. It is easy to occur continuously without going through the state, which is a so-called continuous chan state.

In the short time state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, and the game ball becomes the first ball. The ratio of passing through the 3 count switch (the ratio of the game ball winning V during the 20 special drawing games to generate a big hit) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the short time state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so a small hit occurs during 100 special figure games. The rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins V and a big hit occurs during 100 special game) is set to almost 100%.

In this embodiment, 5 types of big hits A to E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 6 or more big hit types may be provided, and 4 The following types may be provided.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 49 is assigned to the jackpot A in the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 50 Up to 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and up to 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2. 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining big hit B or big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lowered in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 29 of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A, 30 Up to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 270 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 270 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining big hits B and C in which time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is a big hit in the special drawing game of the first special symbol. Is higher than that in the case of occurrence of, and becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

In the present embodiment, when the set value that is set is 1, the percentage of determining the jackpot type as the jackpot C is the highest, the percentage of determining the jackpot B is the next, and the percentage of determining the jackpot A is the highest. It is the lowest (the jackpot type determination ratio in setting value 1: jackpot C> jackpot B> jackpot A). In addition, when the set value that is set is 2, the jackpot type has the highest determination rate for the jackpot B, followed by the jackpot A, and the jackpot C has the lowest. Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: jackpot B> jackpot A> jackpot C). Further, when the set value set is 3, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type A at the highest rate, the jackpot B is determined to be the highest rate, and the jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate. (The jackpot type determination ratio in the setting value 3: jackpot A> jackpot B> jackpot C).

Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. That is, when the jackpot type determination rate differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

In the small hit type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 0 to 99 of the determination value range of MR2 of 0 to 299 are assigned to the small hit A and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to the hit B. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. There is. When the set value is "3", 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. There is. In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the big hit E, which is 100 times the special figure game in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100, is 20 times. It is set to be higher than the proportion for determining the big hit D, and to become lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

In the present embodiment, when the set value that is set is 1, the small hit B is determined as a small hit type with a higher ratio than the small hit A, so that a V winning occurs during the small hit game. Based on this, the percentage of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the percentage to be determined to the jackpot D (the jackpot type determination percentage due to the V prize at the setting value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hit type A and the small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. Based on, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D and the jackpot E is determined to be equal (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 2: jackpot E=jackpot D). Furthermore, when the set value that is set is 3, the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher rate than the small hit B, which is based on the fact that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot D at a higher rate than the jackpot E is determined (a jackpot type determination rate due to a V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination rate of the jackpot type when the variable display result is the jackpot and the determination rate of the jackpot type when the V winning occurs are different according to the set value. That is, since the type of small hit game state controlled according to the set value that is set may change, and the type of big hit game state controlled when a V winning occurs may change, It has become possible to improve the fun of playing games.

Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be a small hit type that is not determined from the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, if the determination rate of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. When the small hit type is determined at different rates according to the variation special map, depending on the variation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different rates according to the variation special map, it is not possible to determine either one of the small hit types (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. It also includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The determination ratio of the big hit type and the small hit type is not limited to different depending on the set value that is set, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

The game nature itself is not limited to one that does not change regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the game playability may change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends based on the game ball passing through the third count switch during the jackpot game. While controlling the subsequent gaming state to a probability variation state, the gaming ball has a different ratio in which the game ball passes the third count switch during the big hit game in accordance with the variation special map (so-called V probability variation type), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value set to is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) that is controlled to a big hit game state based on that. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4). When changing the playability according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability change state or a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch). May be used.

The ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the pre-determined result. As the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits, which is used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit", and the variation display result is determined in advance to "small hit" A large hitting variation pattern determination table used when a large hit, and a deviation variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is “out” are prepared in advance.

FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The big hit variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit pattern. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol.

FIG. 8-9(A) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 300 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1). ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 350 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and from 826 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, and 401 to 850 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

FIG. 8-9(B) shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the setting value is "1", the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 100 out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997. PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are fluctuation patterns of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

The change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C) include a fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hits (PB1-1) and a fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hits (PB1- 2) For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. When the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is higher than the rate of determining the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), Moreover, the set values 1, 2 and 3 become lower in this order. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super-reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α jackpot. The value is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super-reach β is easily determined when the type of big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is decided when the type of big hit is “big hit A”. By assigning a determination value so that the player can be easily played, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that the result will be “big hit B” or “big hit C” is increased. You can do it.

FIG. 8-9(C) shows a variation pattern determination table for small hits. In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is a small hit regardless of the setting value being "1", "2", or "3". Is assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram of a deviation variation pattern determination table. The variation pattern determination table for deviation is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display symbol is to be a variation pattern.

FIG. 8-10(A) shows a variation pattern determination table A for loss. The out-of-shift variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of pending memories is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control. In the variation pattern determination table A for out-of-range, the non-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA1-1) without normalization, the normal reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-2), the super-reach α out-of-range variation pattern A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

FIG. 8-10(B) shows a variation pattern determination table B for deviation. The variation pattern determination table for deviation B is referred to when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table B for out-of-range, the shortened non-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α corresponding to the total pending storage numbers of 2 to 4 A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the out-of-range and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the out-of-range super reach β in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. There is.

FIG. 8-10(C) shows a variation pattern determination table C for deviation. The variation pattern determination table C for deviation is referred to when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table C for out-of-range, a shortened non-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach α corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the out-of-range and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the out-of-range super reach β in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. There is.

FIG. 8-10(D) shows a variation pattern determination table D for deviation. The out-of-shift variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed. In the deviation variation pattern determination table D, a shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), a normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time saving control. -2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) with a deviation of super reach β.

When using the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables A to D, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and is lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. It is supposed to be. Further, when the deviation variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of super-reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are of super-reach β variation. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of range, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the staging effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

The "common determination rate" means that the determination rate is completely the same for different setting values (the present embodiment), and that the determination rate is the same for different setting values (for example, the setting value). 1 to the set value 3, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1%). If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is not limited to the form in which the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set, and if the variable display result is out of alignment, Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, super reach may be the same, or only the determination rate of variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be set. It may be the same. If the variation display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of out-of-reach α and the variation rate of the out-of-reach β variation pattern are set to the set value. However, it is not limited to the same form, and when the variation display result is out, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation and the variation pattern of super-reach β deviation is determined. The determination ratio may be the same regardless of the set value. If the variation display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of out-of-reach α and the variation rate of the out-of-reach β variation pattern are set to the set value. However, it is not limited to the same form, and even when the variation display result is a big hit, the set value at which the determination rate of the change pattern of the super reach big hit is set regardless of the set value being set May be the same regardless of. If the variation display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is not limited to the form that differs depending on the set value that is set, and depending on the set value, Among the reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns, one or more undetermined variation patterns may be present. The fact that the variation pattern determination rate differs depending on the set value means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes making decisions in. It is not limited to the form in which the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table for disparity that differs depending on the total number of pending storages, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol of the variation target (for example, variation display of the first special symbol) The number of reserved storage of the first special symbol, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol when executing), the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table May be determined.

In each of the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the super reach out variation pattern (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is set. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, the jackpot probability and the out-of-range probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variation display is actually performed in the variation pattern of the out-of-reach variation (out-of-reach variation). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to a mode in which the rate of execution in a variation pattern of out-of-reach changes depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability for each set value. In consideration of the deviation probability, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation display may be executed at the same ratio in the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach deviation.

8-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, and is an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the reservation data regarding the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning number into the first starting winning opening (the order in which the game balls are detected) with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition based on the passage (entry) of the game balls. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. , And is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning occurs. The pending data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game This is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made based on the (special map display result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the reservation data relating to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning number (game ball detection order) to the second start winning port with the holding number, and sets the second start condition based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the numerical value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment, are used as pending data , And is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning occurs. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit occurs based on the (special map display result).

In addition, withholding information (first withholding information) based on establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening, and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. ..

The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and the CPU 103 extracts the public figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR4 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information relating to the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting winning opening (belt), the number of winning balls due to winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the first major The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls is totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the first prize hole and the total number of prize balls. The consecutive ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning at the second big prize hole (attacker), and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning in the 1st prize hole and the 2nd prize hole (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of award balls (the number of consecutive winnings of the consecutive winnings) due to winning in the first and second award winning openings (attackers) to the total number of award balls. The winning ratio is the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning in the first major prize hole and second major prize hole (attacker) among the total number of prize balls ( It is the ratio of the number of balls obtained below). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is based on the number of prize balls from the first and second prize holes (attackers) and the prize from the second starting prize hole (Den Chu). Number of prize balls and prize balls due to winning in prize holes (first start prize hole, general prize hole) other than the first prize hole, second prize hole (attacker) and second start prize hole (Den Chu) It is the sum of the number and. The first big winning opening, the second big winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (den Chu) are variable accessories, and the width of the game ball that can be passed is changed, so that the winning of the game ball is won. It is an accessory whose expected proportion fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning opening, the second winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed prizes, and are games. The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed character.

As for the method of totaling and calculating the information on the winning of the game, regarding the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio, the winning balls to the first starting winning hole (navel) and the general winning hole (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000 Number (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of Den Chu balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), first prize hole and second prize hole The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize ball), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the mouth (attacker), is counted. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning the first start prize hole (navel) and general prize hole (sode) to be totaled, the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and special electricity The number of winning prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, 6000 11 sets of memory are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

The display monitor 29 calculates a base ratio (%), a winning combination ratio (%), and a cumulative running ratio (%), a winning combination ratio (%), and a base calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, one display means switches and displays six displays. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first start winning hole (helso), which is aggregated as the game progresses, to the second starting winning hole (den Chu) The number of prize balls due to winning, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) are changed. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting prize hole (navel), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), the first prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) If the number of prize balls due to winning and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, the display timing of the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy occurs. Can be prevented.

In addition, the storage area for storing the information on the winning of the game in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and the general winning award ball, the first starting mouth award ball, the normal electric role award ball, the special electric role award. The balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the first prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating a character ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the number of character acquisition balls, which is the total of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize, is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of balls to be won refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and the electric chu. Further, the number of consecutive winnings balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be calculated by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).

Consecutive ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

Role ratio = [(number of consecutive role-acquiring balls + number of role-acquiring balls)/total number of acquisitions] x 100 (2)

Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total driving] x 100 (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls acquired is 42000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are truncated) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning accessory balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to 3 digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the character ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only operate values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

A third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are both 10. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

For example, when the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired character balls is 19876, the ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876 to calculate the ratio. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing arithmetic in the game controlling microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, and therefore, the following calculation formula is substituted. In the division of 198776/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 1987/343=57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the combination ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, there is an error in the display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, the correct value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69%→70% on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even in the display of the error of 1%.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. In other words, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, until the counter counts the total number of acquired balls above a specific number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits), the combination ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if it is displayed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The storage area in which the information about the winning of the game is stored may be continuously stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area includes a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total prize ball buffer, and the like, in which information related to game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 maximum 2-byte counters is totaled. .. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of acquired balls is greater than the value of the stored total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area in which information about game winnings is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls that have been acquired consecutively is greater than the value of the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display or the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while or after the error display or the warning display is performed.

In addition, when the calculation of the ratio and the ratio has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio, a display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the continuous ratio and the ratio stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch may be arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 that a staff member in the game arcade cannot easily operate. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. The term "directly front" as used herein means the frontal direction from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means between the main board 11 and an attendant of the game arcade who is going to see the main board 11.

The display monitor 29 displays the winning ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and displays the respective values by switching them every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To do. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs that a game medium is newly won in the electric chu or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the continuous ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. When the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided in two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 can display numerical values in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition. It should be noted that it is not limited to a form in which a game medium is detected by a sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chu and the number of prize balls is individually counted based on the detection result. Based on the detection result, the number of winning role balls and the number of consecutive winning role balls are used by using the sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the winning game medium and the winning game medium of Den Chu is merged. May be totaled.

The main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2. On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided. The RAM 102 on the main board 11 has a gate passage counter, a first starting prize number counter, a second starting prize number counter, a first general prize number counter, a second general prize number counter, a third general prize number counter, and a fourth general prize number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of big winnings is counted, and the number of winnings to these first big winning openings is counted. The first big prize number counter and the second big prize number counter for totaling the number of prizes to the second big prize port are individually provided, and the number of prizes to the first big prize port and the second big prize port The number of prizes may be separately calculated, and the number of prizes may be summed to obtain the number of prizes for the attacker.

The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general winning prize counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning prize switch 26A. The second general prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general prize opening switch 26B. The third general award number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the third general award opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning prize counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

8-12 shows the layout of the display monitor 29 and the display contents. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201. The board case 201 is provided with the caulking pins 11B. By providing the caulking pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter, also referred to as “crimped board case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a sealing sticker 11S for certifying that the main board 11 is enclosed is attached to the board case 201. The seal sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the detached portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as the front of the display monitor 29. In this way, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D and a fifth display unit 29E. .. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. Further, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display section 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display section 29B of the second digit and the third display section 29C of the third digit. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 29E of the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done. Here, the short term means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big winning game state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E as a percentage display (% display). In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display), and when the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

The main board 11 uses the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The total number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103, in the main process, the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general winning opening switch. A switch process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharging port switch 70. In the switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified in which entry area the game ball has entered. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, When the detection signal is output from the count switch 23 by adding the values of the first start prize number counter and the second start prize number counter, the value of the big prize number counter is added and the first general winning opening switch 26A. When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the second general winning number counter, The values of the 3 general winning number counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 70, the values of the driving number counter are added to each entry area. The number of game balls that have entered (the number of game balls that have won each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including in the switch processing), it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate totaling program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

FIG. 8-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls to each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning the prize in each prize hole based on the total number of winning game balls in each prize hole, and stores the calculated number of prize balls in the RAM 102 for each prize hole. Let The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole. The number of prize balls per classified prize hole is the general prize hole prize balls (the prize balls from the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)), and the first starting prize hole prize balls (first The number of prize balls for 1 starting prize hole (award ball due to winning a belly button), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to winning a Den Chu), and special electric role award ball (award ball due to winning an attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 separately counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting winning opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first start. The number of winning game balls to the winning openings may be collectively tabulated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general prize hole award balls and the number of prize balls of the first start prize hole prize balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and a total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The storage area for the total sum and the total sum for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256×256×256=16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 pieces of data can be reserved. I can remember.

The RAM 102 stores a ratio combination ratio storage area that stores the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total, 10 sets of bases (base 2) and the last 10 sets of bases (base 1). And a base storage area for storing data. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And a cumulative ratio ratio storage area for storing the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio. Each of the proportion ratio storage areas for storing the proportions and the proportions for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is configured by a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, in the case of storing an integer, the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated by the number of hits of the game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets, and the calculated base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits with respect to the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

FIG. 8-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. The address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are assigned to a built-in ROM area which is a ROM area (0000H to 2FBFH among 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH is a program management area), and the CPU 103 Data is read from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address/data signal line of the internal register is assigned to the internal register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via the internal register area. Write the data. The address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to a built-in RAM area which is an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102. Data is written in the RAM 102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

FIG. 8-15 shows the RWM area which is the built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the control program (may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

The data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total cumulative proportion ratio. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening (for 10 sets). ), a storage area for the total sum of 10) and a storage area for the proportion ratio of 10 sets are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored. 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplemental data, reference data, management data) has 1 byte. If the data has the number of bytes exceeding (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. ..

8-16 shows a display control example on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. A plurality of items are sequentially displayed on the display monitor 29.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a time chart showing a mode of display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, from the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

FIG. 8-16 (B-1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16(B-2) shows a case where the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16(B-3) shows a case of displaying the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No3. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16(B-4) shows a case where the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-5) shows a case where the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-6) shows a case where the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

The display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 300. There is. For example, when the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the display changeover switch 300 is operated. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term winning ratio, and total cumulative continuous ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, The display of the total cumulative combination ratio, base 1, and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the setting value is "2". When the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2” are displayed, by operating the display changeover switch 300, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". When the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “3” are displayed, by operating the display changeover switch 300, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1" and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative value displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

It should be noted that the display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, and only one numerical value out of these consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, or Only two numerical values may be displayed. The present invention is not limited to the form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are the information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. Instead of calculating the winning combination and the base, the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are not limited to being displayed in green, and the short-term ratio is The short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color. The base 1 and base 2 are different from the short-term combination ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio. You may display in color.

FIG. 8-17 shows an execution example of update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage of the ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the ratios of the 10 sets and the total sum is updated. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the 1st to 9th storage areas of the ring buffer are respectively changed to the second storage area. Move from the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, “66”, “117”, “45”, respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 10th storage area to the 10th storage area is set to "27", "81", and "120", respectively. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th memory area is set to “0” and the number of prize balls in the 10th memory area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage areas, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Explanation of game control regarding other features)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in the present embodiment. This main process may be executed instead of the game control main process. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

Then, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether the power-off detection processing has been executed (step Sa7). When the power failure detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents at the time of power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step AKS001, the setting confirmation process is executed (step AKS002), whereby the set value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation process, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. After the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after the setting confirmation processing is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, the main board 11 may transmit a command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, to the effect control board 12.

When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H which is a command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stopped state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the game ball is released by operating the hit ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches is stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are usually used. In the symbol display device 20, it may be controlled so as to stop display of the off symbol and the like, or display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the off symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying this are terminated, and the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. To be done.

If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM clear is performed. The processing is executed to clear the data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information about the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set to the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set to the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10. The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined based on the lock switch signal whether the lock switch 51 is on (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed (step Sa13), and the set value can be changed. In the setting change processing, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display on the display monitor 29. After the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12 or after the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

When the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12, the command 9000H which is a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting change process is not limited to the condition that the lock switch 51 is ON, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as the change permission state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 causes the effect control board 12 to change. Then, a command 9100H which is a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the game stopped state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and a command 93XXH that is a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. To be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is turned on, the setting is made if the lock switch 51 is turned on when the power-off inspection process is not executed or the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The configuration is not limited to the execution of the change process, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

After that, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, the timer is set to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), display random number updating process (step Sa18), initial value random number updating process (step Sa19), and interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

When executing the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process, the CPU 103, based on the display result determination table according to the set value that has been set, and the numerical value data indicating the random value MR1 for the variable display result determination, Whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is decided (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, a fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the set value and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are used to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns. You just have to decide. In this way, by determining the variable display result with a different ratio according to the set value that has been set, it is possible to proceed with the game such that the degree of advantage for the player is different.

In the present embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main processing, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage content of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. .. That is, if the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is turned on. If it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11 to save the RAM 102. The stored contents are initialized (cleared). On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9- You may make it advance to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the storage contents of the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the production control board 12 starts the initialization notification upon receipt of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is executed when the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 and the set value can be changed. There is a risk that the work of changing the value will be hindered. On the other hand, after the setting change process of step Sa13 is completed, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 to Sa11 to start the initialization notification after the change of the set value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the trouble in changing the set value.

FIG. 8-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 8-19(A), the power switch AK002 is operated by an attendant of the game arcade, etc. when the gear ratio, the winning ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 8-19(B). After that, when an attendant or the like of the game arcade presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, when the power supply is started by turning on the power, FIG. As shown in -19(C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting change switch 52 is pressed by an attendant at the game hall while the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. And display it. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is changed to "3". It is sufficient that the display of the first display unit 29A can be cyclically updated between "1" to "3" by updating and updating to "1" if "3" is displayed. After that, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by an attendant of the game arcade or the like, the setting value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated storage) because the operation is detected. To do. At this time, the first display unit 29A is displayed in a blinking manner so that a staff member or the like in the game hall can notice that the new set value is stored.

When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the pending storage based on the pending data in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 151B is erased. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by an attendant or the like in the amusement hall, the setting change processing ends because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 enters a state in which the game can be played by executing the processing of step Sa14 and subsequent steps in the main processing. As a result, for example, the determination result lottery for the variation display result, the type of jackpot, the variation pattern, and the payout of prize balls can be executed. In the setting change process, the initial display displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. For example, the setting value most advantageous to the player A predetermined set value such as "1" or "3" which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player may be displayed.

In the setting change process, the control of sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the mode of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Instead of this, for example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, it may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the first display unit 29A displays “1”. "Is displayed, it is updated to "2", if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1". It suffices if the display on the display unit 29A can be cyclically and sequentially updated between "1" and "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the storage contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 8-20(A), the power switch AK002 is operated by an attendant or the like of the game arcade while the display ratio, the ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 8-20(B). After that, when an attendant or the like in the game arcade operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001, the power supply is started when the power is turned on. As shown in 8-20(C), on the display monitor 29, the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display unit 29A. In the state where this set value is displayed, even if the setting switch 52 is pressed by an attendant of the game arcade or the like, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by an attendant or the like in the game arcade, the setting confirmation processing is ended because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 enters a state in which the game can be played by executing the processing of step Sa14 and subsequent steps in the main processing. As a result, for example, the determination result lottery for the variation display result, the type of jackpot, the variation pattern, and the payout of prize balls can be executed.

In this way, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information on the gaming value that enables confirmation of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. On the display monitor 29, it is possible to display information on set values for advancing the game so as to have different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, by changing the probability that the big hit game state is controlled in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information about the game value, and thus it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the ratio, the ratio, the base, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the display monitor 29 is used to display the ratio, the ratio, the base, etc., while the setting value is displayed using a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. Good. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly separate the control of displaying the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control of displaying the set value using the setting display unit. The processing by the control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. As described above, when the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 is arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on the same substrate as the substrate.

(Explanation of a modified example relating to the configuration and game control in other characteristic parts)
FIG. 8-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the modification in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the set value may be changed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by an attendant or the like in the game hall, and the clear switch AK001 is turned on along with the switching operation for turning on the lock switch 51. When the pressing operation for turning on is performed, these operations are detected, so that the display monitor 29 displays the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by an attendant or the like in the game arcade while the set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A each time the operation is detected. Numerical values are sequentially updated and displayed. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member in the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the detection of the operation. , In the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage).

The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. However, it may be changeable when the power is turned on based on at least the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even if the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on is not detected when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable based on detection of an operation of restoring the stored contents at the time of power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 to turn it on. Thus, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 with the start of the power supply when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the power is turned on Control for changing the set value that has been set may be performed.

When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, special figure reservation storage, general figure reservation storage and game control flag setting section 152, game control timer setting section 153, game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, etc. may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a pending storage in which the variable display result is a big hit is newly generated due to the change of the set value, and a new ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. Can be prevented from being released (a common figure hit occurs), and the fluctuation display result during execution can be prevented from being an unreasonable big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being erased even though the new setting value is not set. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the pending storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In some cases, the hold storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared at the timing when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from not being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are closed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be closed at the timing when the set value being set is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting changing process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from not being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value is not provided on the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from a first display unit 29A to a fifth display unit 29E, and a continuous ratio, a winning ratio, and a base ratio being displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The setting value is not limited to being displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the set value of the base being displayed. In FIG. 8-22(A), the display ratio corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 is displayed as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display.

FIG. 8-22(B) shows an example of display control of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base when the display unit for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the set ratio of 1, the combination ratio, the base is red, the set ratio of 2, the combination ratio, the base is green, the set ratio of 3, the ratio, the base is blue. To display. By displaying the continuous ratio, the winning combination ratio, and the base in different display colors depending on the set value, it is possible to easily understand which set value the numerical value is. In this display control example as well, similar to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to switch and display the ratio, winning combination, and base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds, and at the set value 1 every time the display changeover switch 300 is operated. Changeover ratio, combination ratio, switching display at 5 second intervals to change ratio at setting value 2, change ratio, switching display at 5 second intervals, and further change ratio, setting ratio at setting value 3 , It is only necessary to be able to cyclically change to the switching display of the base at 5 second intervals. Alternatively, switching display of the continuous ratio at the set value 1, the continuous ratio at the set value 2, and the continuous ratio at the set value 3 at 5 second intervals, and the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the set ratio 3 The switching display of the winning ratio at 5 second intervals, the switching display of the base at setting value 1, the setting value of 2 and the setting value of 3 at 5 second intervals are cyclical for each operation of the display changeover switch 300. It may be possible to make various changes.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to the form that can display the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value, and the ratio, the combination ratio, or the combination corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3 can be displayed. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or the lowest value among the calculated continuous ratio, the effective ratio, and the base, or the longest or the shortest measurement time is calculated. Only the value and the like may be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated ratios, winning combinations, and bases is used as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and other values can be changed from the initial display by operating the display changeover switch 300. The display of the display monitor 29 may be switched to the value of.

The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 1, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 2, and the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 3. It is possible to calculate the ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value, and in addition to or instead of the ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value, the ratio, role ratio, and base for these two or more set values are calculated. It may be displayable on the display monitor 29. In this way, by making it possible to display the ratio, the winning combination, and the base at the set values of 2 or more on the display monitor 29, it becomes possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. It should be noted that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, the combination ratio, and the base summed at the two or more setting values can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, and the continuous ratio at the two or more setting values is set. The average value of the winning combination and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying only the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set value that has been set. Further, the display monitor 29 displays the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value as the initial display, and the display change switch 300 is operated to change the set display from the initial display to another set value. You may switch to display of consecutive ratio, winning ratio, and base. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying numerical values other than the base ratio, the winning combination, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour), as the predetermined information according to the set value.

For example, under a specific condition such as immediately after the big hit game is finished or during a time saving state, by using a special variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table in the normal time, a variation display in a specific variation pattern than in the normal time ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily executed. When it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is ended according to the set value that has been set, and the determination is switched to normal determination. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the fifteenth variation display after the big hit game ends, and 16 variations after the big hit game ends. After the first time, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table at the normal time, and if the set value is 2, the special variation pattern determination table is displayed up to the 10th variation display after the jackpot game is over. The variation pattern is determined using, and after the 11th big hit game, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table in the normal time, and when the set value that is set is 3, the big hit game The variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the fifth variation display after the end, and the variation pattern is determined using the normal variation pattern determination table after the sixth jackpot game after the end of the big hit game. Good.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special fluctuation pattern is obtained in the first tenth fluctuation. When the variable display is executed, it suggests that the setting value (for example, the setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the pachinko gaming machine. After the set value set to 1 is changed, when the variable display is executed in a special change pattern in the 30th change, a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous to the player is set. It is also possible to have a game property in which whether or not the variable display is executed with a special change pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of times of the variable display, such as when it is determined that the game is confirmed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game characteristic, when the set value that is set is 1, the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Initialization of the RAM 102 is performed when the change rate is changed in the first tenth change and the rate of change executed in a special change pattern is the highest and the set value is three. Clear) is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, so that the rate of executing the variation in the special variation pattern is the lowest in the first tenth variation. In addition, only when the set value that is set is 1, after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, first The variation may be executed in a special variation pattern at the 30th variation.

The switching condition (the number of fluctuations until the table is switched) for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table differs according to the set value. You may decide by a ratio. Due to the different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value that is set, the determination rate of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the game is played, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

After the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is performed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the variable display is executed 100 times, for example, the variable pattern determination table is used when the determination rate of the variable display of the specific variation pattern (for example, the variation display of the super-reach variation pattern) is normal. The variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the variation pattern. In this case, the execution of the variable display of the change pattern of the super reach may be determined at different determination rates depending on whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. Thereby, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since it is possible to focus the player on the variation display number of the variation pattern of the super reach until the variation display of the variation number of times (for example, 100 times) is performed, the effect of the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach is produced. Can be increased. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of times of variable display is performed. A change pattern that can be determined only until the setting is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed to the player by executing the change display according to the change pattern according to these set values. Notification may be possible.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display is executed 100 times), the determination rate of fluctuation patterns other than super reach such as non-reach and normal reach varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A variation pattern different from a normal variation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, and super reach depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the variation time is extremely short such as 0.1). The determination rate of the variation pattern or the variation pattern of which the variation time is extremely long such as 10 minutes) may be different.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a particular effect is executed until the variable display is performed 100 times). For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the most advantageous setting value for the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). ), the high set value suggestion effect may be most difficult to be executed. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination rates of the fluctuation patterns may be different.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a state of probability after the big hit game is finished, and the game after the big hit game is finished based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a probability change state. In this case, as the big hit type, a big hit type that opens the second big winning opening during the big hit game, that is, a big hit type (hereinafter, big hit X) in which the game ball can pass through the third count switch during the big hit game, Do not open the second big winning hole during the big hit game, that is, a big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) that the game ball cannot pass the third count switch during the big hit game, and determine the ratio of these big hit X and big hit Y May be different according to the set value. By doing so, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game is finished can be made different according to the set value that has been set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition to, or instead of, the percentage that the variable display result is a big hit and the determination percentage of the big hit type are different, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening, the big prize in each round during the big hit game You may make it the upper limit number of winnings of the game ball to a winning opening differ according to the set value that has been set. Further, the opening patterns of the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening during the big hit game may be different according to the set value that is set. As a result, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

It is also possible to provide a movable body in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and to be able to execute a movable body effect in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of the advancing/retreating operation of the restricting member inside the second special winning opening, and also to confirm the operation of the movable body and set the movable body to the initial position. When the movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or the pachinko gaming machine). The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed when a new set value is set to 1. This makes it possible to accurately reflect the new set value in the operation of the regulating member or the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main processing. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interruption occurs. When the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be simultaneously started, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. This makes it possible to properly perform the initialization control related to the winning of the game ball.

The determination rate of the super reach variation pattern may be different depending on the set value that is set. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

8-23 and 8-24 show a modification in which the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless an attendant of the game hall or the like opens the game machine frame 3. is there. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed It may be possible to prevent an unauthorized change of the setting value of the gaming machine 1.

The security cover 500A is attached to the lower right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A comes close to the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated. Can be On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is covered with the security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body toward the front by the security cover 500A), it is possible to strengthen the illegal setting value change of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. May be prevented. When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or the security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

FIG. 8-25 shows a modification in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided slidably in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is provided with a lock switch 51 and a setting switch 52 on the back. The state of covering from the side may be immovable. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting switch 52.

FIG. 8-26 shows a modification in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported with respect to a vertically oriented pivot provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is clamped between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 may be immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting switch 52.

When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security cover is made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to interfere with the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the seal. Good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different game characteristics such as a probability variation loop type and a V probability variation type. In case of probability variation loop type or V probability variation type, there is a function (so-called small hit time) that can increase balls with a small hit that opens the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game ends. You may have. In the case of a gaming machine having the function of small hit time, the big hit probability is changed according to the set value (for example, when the set value is 1, the big hit probability in the normal state is set to 1/200 and the big hit probability in the probability changing state is set. Is set to 1/20, and when the set value is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set to 1/30), and when one set value is set, , It is easier to rush into the small hit time because the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, but the probability of being a big hit during the probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set. Since it is also high, it is easy to finish the small hit time. In other words, when the function of the small hit time is installed in the pachinko gaming machine that can execute the probability variation control, the probability of entering the small hit time is high while the probability of entering the small hit time is high as the set value with the high big hit probability in the normal state is set. The hit time is hard to continue, and the smaller the big hit probability in the normal state is set, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier it is to continue the small hit time. Therefore, in the probability variation loop type or V probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, not only can the range of games be widened by installing a small hit time function, but a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even with the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is in use, it is possible to urge the player to play a game.

In the V-probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variation control determination big winning opening in the probability variation control determining round is a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball is easy to win in the probability variation control determining large winning opening). ) And the short-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the gaming ball is difficult to win in the probability variation control big winning opening), the long-term opening pattern and the short-term opening pattern are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the substantial probability variation probability (proportion of the probability variation big hit) may be different.

A big hit type determining gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second special winning opening), and after a special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, a game ball passes through the big hit type determining gate. The random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type may be extracted at the timing, and the big hit game according to the big hit type determined based on the value of the extracted MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this manner, the jackpot types are determined at different rates according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpots and 4 round jackpots are provided as jackpot types). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round jackpot is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 If 3 is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 round jackpot is the lowest).

The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. In this way, when the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 of the hitting ball operation handle or the hitting ball launching device. By providing the glass door frame 3a in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a cannot be operated unless it is opened.

It is only necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state advantageous to the player, such as at least the big hit game state, to be determined at different rates according to the set value that has been set. The variation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value that is set. Depending on the set value, it determines whether or not the variable display result will be "big hit" or "small hit" at different rates, but at the same rate regardless of the set value, the big hit type In the case of determining the or variation pattern, the determination rate of the variation pattern is not changed even if the setting value is changed, so that it is difficult or difficult to suggest the setting value to the player or the like. When not only the variation display result but also the variation pattern etc. are determined at different rates according to the set value, the variation pattern determination rate is also changed when the setting value is changed. Can suggest or easily suggest a set value.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main process in response to the start of the power supply by turning on the power source, so that the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can be performed. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, or the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value being set can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 8-27 shows an example of the state control according to the switch detection when the power is turned on. When the lock switch 51 is turned on and the clear switch AK001 is turned on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process to set Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, and thus the initialization state is obtained. Control. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step Sa12 of the main process, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main process. By doing so, the power recovery state is controlled. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step AKS001 of the main process, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as an on/off switching operation and a pressing operation by an attendant of the game arcade. , It is possible to control the state according to those detection results.

(Explanation of means relating to the above characteristic part)
The above-described embodiment includes the following characteristic portions. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine capable of setting a set value, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, a dedicated set value display means for displaying the set value that is set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that I could not. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part for solving this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be played using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big-hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing of Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
With game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
A game in which a game value is added based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first big winning opening, a second big winning opening, etc.) Value adding means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a big hit open process),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit;
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, since it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, the increase in the cost of the gaming machine is prevented. You can

As a game machine of the means 2 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to the set value (for example, a portion on the display monitor 29 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, a base, etc.).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2). (A part that is displayed sequentially at 5-second intervals, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 is described, and in the means 3, the predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can display the predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, in the set value 1, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in red, and in the set value 2, the continuous ratio, (The ratio and the base are displayed in green, and the set value is 3, the ratio, the ratio, and the base are displayed in blue.)
The gaming machine described in means 2 or means 3 is described, and in this means 4, the predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 of the above characteristic part,
An operating means (for example, the display changeover switch 300, etc.) is provided,
The information display means can switch and display the predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 300, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part where the display is switched to the display of the set value 2, the ratio, the ratio, and the base, and the display of the set ratio 2, the ratio, and the base is changed to the set ratio 3, the ratio, and the base. (Switching part etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of means 2 to 4 is described, and in this means 5, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion that can display only a ratio, a combination ratio, and a base according to the set value set). Such)
The game machine described in any one of means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, the confirmation work of the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a game machine of the means 7 of the above characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, CPU 103 has a consecutive ratio (%) for 6000 pieces, a combination ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination) A portion for calculating the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the last 60,000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls. Etc.),
The calculating means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general winning award ball, a first starting mouth award ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a prize ball total, The total driving amount can be calculated individually for each set value by being stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value).
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values among the set values (for example, a serial ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3, (Position, the part that can display only the base, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 is described, and in this means 7, the information confirmation work can be easily performed.

As the gaming machine of the means 8 of the above characteristic part, a calculating means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the CPU 103 has a serial ratio (%) of 6000 pieces, a winning ratio (%)). , And the base ratio calculated based on the cumulative ratio (%), the winning combination ratio (%), and the last 60,000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), the base calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. (Including the part that calculates the base 2 (%)),
The calculating means can individually calculate the individual information which is the information corresponding to each setting value, and can calculate the composite information which is the information corresponding to two or more different setting values (for example, The ratio for calculating the combined ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for two or more set values), and the information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a series of two or more set values). (A part that calculates the ratio, winning ratio, and base and can display it on the display monitor 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 is described, and according to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of effect control regarding other feature parts)
FIG. 8-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described characteristic portion. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above embodiment, unlike the above embodiment, the power-on command process (step Perform AKS012). After the power-on command processing is executed, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step AKS013), and if it is turned off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and stands by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state (step AKS014), command analysis processing (step AKS015), and effect control process processing. (Step AKS016) and random number updating process for rendering (step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step AKS012 as the power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether the received command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). When the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9200H which is the power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not the power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9100H which becomes the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which becomes the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeatedly executes steps AKS021 to AKS024 until the received command is obtained and stands by. In addition, when a predetermined error determination time has elapsed without being able to acquire the received command, it may be notified that an error has occurred in the received command.

When it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is the setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start time process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start process, in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped. In the game stop state start-time process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. Thereby, for example, it is only necessary to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. A limit is set as a range or limit.

After the game stop state start time process is executed in step AKS025, control for starting setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting change notification sound. Then, control may be performed. After the control of setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is ended. When the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the process at the end of the game stop state, the command reception from the main board 11, which has been invalidated, may be set to be valid. Thereby, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit can be executed.

Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until the predetermined initialization notification time elapses based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. The control may be performed such that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification may be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage content of the RAM 102 has been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 with the start of power supply by turning on the power is detected.

When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start time process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, the command other than the setting confirmation end command is set to invalidate the reception. do it. Thereby, for example, it is only necessary to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stopped state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects that accompany the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stopped state are not executed. A limit is set as a range or limit.

After the game stop state start time process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting confirmation notification sound. Then, control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined to end the setting confirmation. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not ended (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so that the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thereby, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit can be executed.

After that, control for executing the power failure recovery notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the power failure recovery notification sound. Alternatively, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the content stored in the RAM 102 has been restored to the content at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 with the start of the power supply when the power is turned on is not detected. Good.

FIG. 8-30 shows control priorities regarding notification and screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stopped state in which the progress of the game is stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start time process in step AKS025 or step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start time process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control related to normal production is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power-saving function setting screen displays the power-saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (gaming machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable presence/absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by RTC. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen or the like, it is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to effect control, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. It becomes degree.

In this way, since the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. If the control is started or the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the end of the setting change or the setting confirmation. Even if it does, the display of the power saving function setting screen does not start due to the switching of the output amount changeover switch. In this way, the display regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen, is displayed with priority over the display regarding the output amount or output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and thus it is possible to prevent the trouble in changing the set value.

(Explanation of a modified example relating to effect control in other feature parts)
FIG. 8-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed in the modification in which the setting confirmation processing can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the set value may be confirmed during the game. In this case, when the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a person in charge of the game arcade, and a switching operation for turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. Since the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even when the setting switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade, etc., and is a display for confirming the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and the main board 11 sends a command 9401H as a setting confirmation end command to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after performing the effect random number updating process in step AKS017, the ongoing setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting monitor is displaying the set value that can be confirmed on the display monitor 29 (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period after the control in step AKS058 is performed until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting confirmation is not in progress (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress in the period until the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received after the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the ON state (step AKS054). The ongoing setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. When it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), after the setting confirmation flag in progress is turned on in step AKS054, waiting for a customer transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. It is determined whether or not the demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is ended.

When it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the ongoing setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, when the ongoing setting confirmation flag is ON (step AKS056; Yes), the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed after clearing the ongoing setting confirmation flag and turning it OFF (step AKS057). (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. Thereby, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

When it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

When the setting check process is executed during the game and the set value that is set is displayed on the display monitor 29 by executing the ongoing setting check process, on the production control board 12 side, After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the effect being executed is not stopped, and the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented.

In the case of executing the setting confirmation process during the game on the main board 11 side, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the production control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending a setting confirmation start command together with a customer waiting demonstration designation command, a special command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is transmitted, and the set value set after the progress of the game is completed. You may make it control the state which can confirm.

Alternatively, the set value that has been set is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not have to perform a display corresponding to the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation processing is executed during the game, a display capable of confirming the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29 without transmitting a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. You may make it control to start. In this case, in the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game continues.

In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change completion notification and the setting confirmation completion notification may be executed. For example, in the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS028 ends the setting change notification, and the setting change end notification period starts with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period ends. The setting change completion notification may be terminated. In the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS034 terminates the setting confirmation notification, and the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and with the end of the setting confirmation end notification period. The setting confirmation completion notification may be terminated.

In the setting change notification, control may be performed such that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed such that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification voice, or in place of part or all of them, a part or all of the light-emitting members of the game effect lamp 9 or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the above is emitted in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to displaying the setting confirmation notification screen and outputting the setting confirmation notification voice, or instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 is replaced. Alternatively, control may be performed such that all the light emitting members or an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification may be performed by using an arbitrary performance device or a notification device different from the performance device to notify that the setting value can be changed. The setting confirmation notification may be performed by using an arbitrary performance device or a notification device different from the performance device to notify that the setting value can be confirmed. Note that the configuration change notification and the setting confirmation notification are not limited to the above-described configuration, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

It is not limited to the form in which the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command and the 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command are prepared. A common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command. It may be one that is available. In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 71AK)
FIG. 8-33 shows an example of the configuration of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic part 71AK of the present embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in a board case that houses the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output. It is sufficient that the effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 includes at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when an attendant of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, opening the gaming machine frame 3 is a condition for changing the initial setting of the effect output. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched whether to permit or prohibit change adjustment of the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store the data indicating the effect output setting in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

As shown in FIG. 8-33(B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the operation is performed by rotating the knob 71AK002 to switch to the channel. The corresponding switch positions can be switched. In the present embodiment, the volume is initially set to any of six levels depending on whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" to "F", and the volume adjustment by the player is performed. Whether to permit or not can be switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or through a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

FIG. 8-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to "97.0", and the volume control (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. .. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is impossible (prohibited), so the effect is set by the initially set effect output. Is executed. In addition, corresponding to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the effect display device 5 can display a power saving function setting screen, the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode), and The RTC 126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

In this way, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is accepted by the knob 71AK002, and based on the detection of the operation for switching the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages is executed based on the switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

FIG. 8-35 shows an example of execution of setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification regarding the characteristic part 71AK. In this execution example, as the setting change notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A), the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35(B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35(C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic part 71AK, the power-on command processing is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing, as in the above embodiment. In this power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Further, the control in step AKS030 starts the initialization notification with the start of the initialization notification period and ends the initialization notification with the end of the initialization notification period. It should be noted that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and may be part of the display area of the effect display device 5. May be displayed.

The characteristic portion 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting of effect output such as volume in any of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. It may be output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 for notifying the message "setting is being changed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 for notifying the message “setting confirmation is in progress” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 for notifying the message "it has been initialized" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

In this way, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected according to the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is the notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification is given as the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 by the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the production output. .. Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, as the output of the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03, the notification may be performed with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the production output. In this way, since the notification is made by the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed in association with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clear) of the storage content in the RAM 102.

FIG. 8-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, power saving function setting, and the like are performed on the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the production output has not been adjusted by the player, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 8-36(A) shows the player sound volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images showing 6 memories corresponding to 6 levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is changed according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). .. At this time, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2” in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, and the first volume is displayed on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increases the display color memory by one. In this way, each time the first motion of tilting the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (rightward or the like) is detected, a plurality of stages of effects are produced until the setting of the effect output reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed so as to be increased step by step. On the other hand, each time the second motion of tilting the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount of a plurality of stages is set until the effect output setting reaches the minimum. It may be changed so as to decrease by one step.

When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 8-36(B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) are detected in response to the detection of an operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by an attendant at the game hall. Also, the RTC 126 sets (changes) a value indicating the current date and time. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when it is set to select "power saving mode A" in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demo screen is displayed. Anything can be done. In addition, when it is set to select “power saving mode B” in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed during the variable display in addition to the customer waiting demonstration. Any control that activates the power saving function, such as reducing the (light emission amount), may be performed.

FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization processing (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command processing (step 71AKS012) as in the above-described embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. If After executing the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012, unlike the above embodiment, the start-time output switching processing (step AKS013) is executed. After that, similarly to the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step 71AKS014), and if it is turned off (step 71AKS014; No), the processing of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state (step 71AKS015), command analysis processing (step 71AKS016), and effect control process processing. (Step 71AKS017) and random number updating process for production (step 71AKS018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, the ongoing output changing processing (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the processing returns to step 71AKS014.

FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS013 as the start-time output switching processing. In the start-time output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032). If the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and output at the time of start. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control for starting the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so that the effect display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the settings such as the power saving function. After the control for setting the power saving function is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is confirmed on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), the control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. The control may be performed as described above.

When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching processing is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the power saving function data indicating the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is made, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the ongoing output changing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the production output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the production control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. When such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated by the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified by the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match. It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

When it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, when the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control for starting the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same process as steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching process at the start may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and if not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. After that, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058).

When the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or the control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After that, based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is determined whether the player can adjust the volume or the like (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of "0" to "5", it is possible for the player to set (adjust) the volume (correspondence). It may be determined that the adjustment can be made by the player. When the adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the output change processing in progress is ended. Note that the switch position is not limited to the determination of whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

When it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not an action for changing the output amount of the effect is detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the effect output amount in multiple stages. It may be determined whether or not there was. When such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control for adjusting the output amount according to the detection result is performed (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output changing process is ended. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. You can do it.

(Explanation of a modification regarding the characteristic part 71AK)
FIG. 8-40 shows the priority of control regarding notification and screen display by effect control in the modification of the characteristic part 71AK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the power supply is started and power supply is started, when the setting is changed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stopped state in which the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, when the setting confirmation state is controlled, the game stop state may not be controlled. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start time process in step AKS031 of the power-on command process, and in the setting confirmation state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. You may validate the input of the changeover switch signal which can specify a switch position. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority of the setting change notification AKP11 and the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

In this way, since the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, when the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. Even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the end of the setting change, regardless of the detection of the operation of changing over the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, when the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation is finished, the power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of changing over the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. In this way, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may not be executed when changing the set value, while control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed when confirming the set value. .. This makes it possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect as well as the confirmation of the set value in the case of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

By executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start-time output switching processing in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. However, it is not limited to the mode in which the output amount control of the effect is not controlled, and whether or not the operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected in the power-on command processing is detected. If it is possible to make a judgment and the action is detected, information indicating that the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is finished, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. It may be one that does. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not ended, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the switch position identification result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Then, in step 71AKS031 of the start-time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. Also in this case, in the setting change state, it is possible to restrict not to control the output amount of the effect regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

Alternatively, when it is in the setting change state, it is determined whether or not it is a specific switch position, for example, whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, and when it is the specific switch position. In addition, the control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which was prioritized, on the effect display device 5 is also ended. It suffices if the display device 5 can start the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting a motion that the player performs a predetermined operation is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the motion by the detection device. Good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a set value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation and a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the set value change switch. Based on, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed as in the case where the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and the start-time output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, for example, the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start time process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control related to normal production is not executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, so that the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the setting value to be changed, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, the effect Execution of control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of is limited (prohibited). As a result, the control for changing the set value is prioritized over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the work for changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

The effect control CPU 120 controls execution of effects in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of effect is accepted by the knob 71AK002. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in the case of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, after power-on command processing is executed in step 71AKS012, start-time output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control for switching the initial setting of effect output according to the switch position is performed in step 71AKS033, or control for setting a power saving function or the like is performed in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed at the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in the case of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

When setting change notification is performed by the sound output from the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is set regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. , Is output at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when the notification is made by the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is possible to prevent an illegal act when the setting value changing work is prevented from being hindered. Can also be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 71AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 71AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine capable of changing the setting related to the effect, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2015-29614. However, in the technologies described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2015-29614 A, control is not considered when changing effect settings while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. It was Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can set any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25) that can progress the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply starts.
Production adjustment detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to the adjustment of the production output amount;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the ongoing output change processing of step 71AKS019 is performed. CPU120 for performance control to be executed),
In the change permitting state, a limiting unit that limits the execution of the control by the output amount control unit regardless of the detection of the operation by the production adjustment detection unit (for example, step AKS012 as the power-on command process of step 71AKS012). CPU120 for effect control for executing processing) and the like,
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the execution of the control by the output amount control means is limited in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
Production control means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production according to progress of game,
A production control board provided with the production control means (for example, production control board 12 or the like),
The effect control board is further provided with a reception unit (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that receives an operation that can be detected by the effect adjustment detection unit.
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the output amount of the effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
When the output adjustment control unit detects an operation by the effect adjustment detection unit before the change permission state ends, the output amount control unit operates by the effect adjustment detection unit after the change permission state ends. Control to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 71AK,
Different from the operation during the game by the player, an initialization detection means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine is provided,
In the change permission state, the setting value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52, etc. ),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the setting value changing operation without separately providing a configuration for changing the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
A change notification unit (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying the change of the set value by the setting unit is provided,
The change notification means gives notification (for example, output of a setting change notification sound 71AKE01) by a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means.
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered while preventing the setting value from being changed due to an illegal act.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set by the setting unit is provided.
The output amount control means,
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, in the setting screen of the power saving function higher than the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification). Priority 71AKP12, etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection unit is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen). 71AKP11 etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, while the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled when changing the set value. It is possible to prevent trouble.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 8-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable rendering device and a second movable member serving as a second movable rendering device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (withdrawal position). After the evacuation position, the operation effect is performed in which the object moves upward diagonally to the right, stops at the advancing position that overlaps the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returns to the evacuation position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time, with the origin position being in the closed state where they are united. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thereby, after the first movable member has advanced to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the operation motor AK012 brings the first to third split pieces into the open state. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The sliding mechanism of the first movable member slides laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces have been rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member uses the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces as the origin position when the first movable member is in the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and sets the slide mechanism on the left side of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right position.

The second movable member stops with the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (withdrawal position). The operation effect of descending from the retracted position, stopping at the advancing position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the retracted position again is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the original position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state of the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that allows the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that enables the second movable member to move between the original position and the advanced position.

The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of effect as the game progresses. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the normal effect operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the original position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid arrow 72KM01, the turning mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the original position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. To the overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as indicated by a broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved by the driving force of the operation motor AK012 from the closed position at the origin position to the open position. After that, as indicated by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013 and then moved to the left movable position. After returning to the original position. Then, as indicated by the solid arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as indicated by broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the original position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 and then returned to the original position (retracted position).

When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, the operation may be performed by omitting a part of the long initial operation. For example, among the operations shown by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations shown by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operations indicated by solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 are required. Further, in the long initial operation, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member operate so that the movement amount becomes larger than the operation indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. May be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount becomes smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result of the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, as an operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position, the dashed arrow 72AKM03 The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so that the movement amount becomes smaller than the movement amounts indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. The motor AK021 is driven. Further, the second movable member may be moved as indicated by broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

FIG. 8-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data forming these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a production operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first production executed along with the progress of the game, such as reach production. The production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second production different from the first production executed along with the progress of the game, such as a preliminary production. .. As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic unit 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005) as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the returning operation for returning the movable member to the original position when the setting is changed as the change permitted state. Even in the period after the step 72AKS008 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended, as in the above-described embodiment (step 72AKS008). When the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 to end the setting change (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control of executing the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed after the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permitted state. It is possible to prevent the control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and then control for executing the long initial operation. Is performed (step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the long initial operation. When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. ..

When it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015) as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Then, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a control for executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 72AKS018 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended, as in the above-described embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and stands by. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 to end the setting confirmation (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command process is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. It is possible not to control the execution of. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control for executing the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 ends. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state is not controlled as the change permission state, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modification regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 8-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on command processing executed in the modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), the control for executing the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS032), the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, and the control for executing the initialization notification is performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 have been initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on. Correspondingly, initialization informing is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation following the short initial operation that is the return operation. .. In addition, even after the game stop state end time process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, and then a return operation is short-circuited. Following the initial operation, it is possible to perform control to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation. As described above, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the common control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. , It is possible to control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), and the control for executing the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is ended. When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command, the stored content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the stored content at the time of power failure with the start of power supply by turning on the power. .. When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation following the short initial operation that is the recovery operation. it can. Further, even after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in step 72AKS033, 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is confirmed. After the state is completed, it is possible to perform control to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. In this way, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002, and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the common control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. , It is possible to control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed in response to the power failure recovery notification, or may be controlled to be executed without the power failure recovery notification. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed on the basis of the satisfaction of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation that is a return operation and a long initial operation that is an initial operation can be executed. In the production accompanying the progress of the game, it is sufficient if it can be operated in a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily designated according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position. It is possible to prevent the trouble. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed to perform the short initial operation as the return operation. Then, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. When the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed in the setting confirmation state. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, the long initial operation that is the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, and the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, in step 72AKS011, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation that is the initial operation. As a result, in the case of preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to prevent unnecessary movement of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation subsequent to the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to perform the control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), and when the initialization related to the control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is performed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. Even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, so that the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are executed. Take control. This makes it possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. After that, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, in step 72AKS021, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, control is performed to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed in the setting confirmation state. With this, in order to prevent the trouble of changing the set value, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the long initial operation that is the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state. To do so. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Section 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 72AK, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the original position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-212154 do not consider the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete with each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can set any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25) that can progress the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different,
A setting control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting unit when power supply starts.
A movable member operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, etc.),
Movable control means (eg, step) capable of performing at least control of a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. AKS012 power-on command processing to execute the command control CPU120 and the like),
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 72AK,
The movement control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permitting state, the control for executing the initial operation subsequent to the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change permitted state, and prevent the work for changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent useless movements of the movable member and prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the game machine is initialized along with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification means for executing the initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.),
The movement control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation subsequent to the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014, etc.),
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by standardizing the operation of the movable members and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set by the setting unit is provided.
The movement control means,
When it is in the setting confirmation state, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state ends, control to execute the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by not performing the initial operation by the movable member in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent a trouble in changing the set value.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 8-45 is a flow chart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic portion 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Also in the characteristic part 73AK, the operation contents of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as those of the characteristic part 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). When it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). When the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the setting is changed as the change permitted state, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed. ..

When it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, control for executing the short initial operation is performed. Perform (step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends. When the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Can be controlled to execute. Further, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform the control of executing the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state is finished. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation that is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation that is the initial operation. Control can be performed to perform the action.

After that, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation. Alternatively, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013) as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Then, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 73AKS016 and subsequent steps, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016). When the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 73AKS016 to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the command processing at power-on ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is set, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. It is possible not to control the execution of. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control for executing the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the power supply is not started and the control is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

FIG. 8-46 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmation" is displayed, and a history of set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of set values may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, the history of the set values is stored in a predetermined area in a predetermined storage area (for example, a flash memory) separately from the RAM 122, and the set value information is stored together with the RTC information in the effect control board 12. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, as for the history of set values, in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the set value information is stored together with the RTC information in the backup area, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. In addition, by transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 supplies power. It may be made possible to specify it with the start of.

When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of setting values is grasped. Hard to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that the movable state can be obtained when the setting check state for checking the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation for returning the member to the original position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by an attendant at the game arcade or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When, the control for executing the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation is not performed. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, in this setting confirmation state, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed, while the long initial operation that is the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after it becomes possible for an attendant or the like of the game arcade to easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of set values from being difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

It should be noted that the history of set values may be displayed even when the setting change state is controlled. In this case, in the setting change state as the change permission state, control for executing the short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position may be performed. In this way, when the set value history can be displayed by controlling the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed to set the set value. The history may be easily grasped.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step 73AKS010, control is executed to execute the short initial operation. .. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed. Thus, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation, which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position, is not executed, so that the operation for changing the set value is not hindered by the return operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, after the setting change is determined to be completed in step 73AKS007, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, thereby performing the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is finished, the control to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation is performed, so when it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value, It is possible to properly return the member to the original position.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation that is the return operation. Then, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform the control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), and when the initialization related to the control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is performed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. Even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are executed. Take control. This makes it possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command, control is executed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 which is the setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the set values is being displayed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 controls execution of effect in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, when the command 9100H which is the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H which is the setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H which is the power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command. Thus, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, when the setting change state that allows the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled, the command as the information different from that when the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. To be done. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 73AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, one described in JP 2010-200902A. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the original position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-212154 do not consider the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete with each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can set any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25) that can progress the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different,
A setting control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting unit when power supply starts.
A movable member operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, etc.),
At least a movable control means capable of executing a control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012),
The movement control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the restoration operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
In the change permission state, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is not executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to properly operate the movable member and prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the game machine is initialized along with the start of the power supply, an initialization notification unit that executes initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 that executes step 73AKS012). Etc.),
The movement control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by standardizing the operation of the movable members and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The setting display means (for example, the effect display device 5 or the like) capable of executing the setting confirmation display for confirming the set value set by the setting means is provided,
The setting display means can display the history of the set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01),
When the setting confirmation display is being executed, the movable control means performs control to execute the return operation and does not execute control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015, 73AKS016, etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped and the setting value changing operation may be hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015) for controlling effect execution based on information from the game control means,
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits different information (for example, a command 9100H which is a setting change start command) from the case where the change permission state is not controlled. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 related to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load of the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 8-47 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect, regarding the characteristic part 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data forming the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after the power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic part 74AK is that the left speaker 8L outputs the trumpet sound twice, the right speaker 8R outputs the drum sound twice, and the stick controller 31A outputs the confirmation sound. And a confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operating rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables setting of the initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, and confirmation The first confirmation effect control data 74AKKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound in which the sound of the trumpet is output twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound in which the sound of the drum is output twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control the confirmation vibration for driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A by two sets in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmation corresponding to the matched determination value. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, confirmation sound can be output and confirmation vibration can be executed.

Further, during execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started and the confirmation sound is output from the left speaker 8L. When the confirmation sound output from the left speaker 8L ends, the confirmation sound output from the right speaker 8R starts. When the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R is finished, the confirmation vibration is started by the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Then, the execution is started. Any one of the output of the confirmation sound from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control for executing is performed, the control for executing the other effects is not performed. In this way, when any one of the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so as not to execute the other effect. In this way, it is possible for staff members in the game hall to easily understand whether or not the production using each production device can be normally performed by outputting the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration at different timings. You can

8-48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 74AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization processing (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command processing (step 74AKS012) as in the above-described embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed and stands by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is ON (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the OFF state (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing. (Step 74AKS016) and random number updating process for effect (step 74AKS017) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 74AK, after executing the confirmation effect control processing (step 74AKS018), the process returns to step 74AKS013.

8-49 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. After that, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is first made, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

When it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation acceptance period may be started with the start of the initialization notification and may be terminated with the passage of a predetermined confirmation acceptance time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

When it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032 or when it is determined that the confirmation acceptance period is in step 74AKS033 (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display is started (step 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display is started by receiving the first variation start command and the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped and the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By stopping the confirmation acceptance period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect by controlling so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap.

When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process is performed. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set so that the determination of the timer value is performed (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. In addition, when it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the motion is detected and the setting for executing the confirmation effect is performed, the control for ending the confirmation reception period may be performed.

When it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being produced (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed, for example, when the elapsed time measurement by the confirmation effect process timer has started. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation presentation is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display is started (step 74AKS041). When it is determined that the variable display is started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. Thus, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

When it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

When it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Moreover, after setting is made so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control processing is ended.

FIG. 8-50 is a timing chart or the like showing a control example of confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK. In FIG. 8-50(A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. In FIG. 8-50(B), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is detected. In this case, the case is controlled in which the setting is changed. FIG. 8-50(C) shows the control content at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of the power supply at the timing 74AKT01 when the power is turned on, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. .. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in step AKS030 is performed and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. It When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect is started, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of the first to third confirmation effects are obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. After that, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and control is performed in step 74AKS045, whereby the confirmation effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case where the setting control state is controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. Determined as received. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, since it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is the setting change start command, after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed, the control of step AKS026 is performed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for the case where the setting change end command is received, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended at the step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, so that it follows the steps AKS028 and AKS029. The control of step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started.

In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at the timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control processing of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 74AK, the initialization notification is performed at step 74AKS031. Is determined to be started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation acceptance period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect is started, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of the first to third confirmation effects are obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. After that, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and control is performed in step 74AKS045, whereby the confirmation effect ends.

The effects included in the confirmation effect may be effects using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or in place of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be capable of executing.

As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 74AK, the power-on command processing is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, for example, the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start time process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control related to normal production is not executed. In this case, control for executing the confirmation effect is also not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control is performed to execute initialization notification in step AKS030. After that, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, for example, when it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and the subsequent steps. Perform control to execute. In this way, when the power supply is turned on and the power supply is started, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed when the setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted to be changed is controlled. As a result, the control for changing the set value is prioritized over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the work for changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the power-on command processing, the control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed corresponding to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. To do. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation acceptance period is established by executing the control in step 74AKS032, and then it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation is detected, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. .. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

When the confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the storage content of the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. ), the common confirmation acceptance period is the same as when the setting confirmation state ends. The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period. This makes it possible to standardize the control relating to the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control load of the confirmation effect when the work of changing the set value is prevented from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic unit 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, and thereby enables control to output the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation voice by the speakers 8L and 8R which are the sound output means. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 74AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 74AK, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation compete with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 74AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing the trouble of changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can set any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25) that can progress the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different,
A setting control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting unit when power supply starts.
Production means capable of executing production (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control unit (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation production control process of step 74AKS018) capable of executing the confirmation production control by the production unit based on the establishment of the confirmation production condition. Equipped with
The confirmation control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS021 and AKS030). ),
In the change permission state, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030, etc.). ),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
It is provided with a game detecting means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting a motion by the player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period common to when the change permission state ends. Control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the execution of the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 74AK,
A sound output unit (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting effect sound is provided,
The confirmation effect includes output of confirmation sound by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 75AK)
FIG. 8-51 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). When it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005) as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. The control for starting the notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). When the setting change is not completed (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above embodiment, the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and then the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, the setting change confirmation confirmation control processing is executed in step 75AKS008, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply. When this occurs, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

When it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes), after the game stop state end process is executed in step 75AKS010, control for executing initialization notification is executed. Then (step 75AKS011), the power-on command processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), after the processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), power-on command processing is terminated. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of the power supply, the setting change confirmation confirmation effect control processing of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is set. When controlled, the process corresponding to the setting effect confirmation effect control process is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect in the setting change state is performed, the control for enabling the confirmation effect in the setting confirmation state is not performed.

FIG. 8-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the setting effect confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is ON, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the ON state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the setting effect confirmation effect control process ends.

When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). When no motion is detected in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting change confirmation effect control process is ended. When it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the motion is detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as the setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the setting change confirmation production control process, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed, so that in the setting change state as the change permission state, an arbitrary period is not provided, such as a confirmation reception period. It is possible to start the execution of the confirmation effect by establishing the confirmation effect condition by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B at the timing.

If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

When it is determined in step 75AKS040 that it matches the determination value (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting is made so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control processing is ended.

FIG. 8-53 is a timing diagram or the like showing a control example of confirmation effect with respect to the characteristic portion 75AK. In FIG. 8-53(A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to the ON state is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. In FIG. 8-53(B), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON are detected. In this case, the case is controlled in which the setting is changed. FIG. 8-53(C) shows the control content at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT01, the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02, which is the same as the case where the setting change state is not controlled by the characteristic unit 74AK. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and along with this, the confirmation acceptance period is started. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. Using, the plurality of types of effects, which are the first to third confirmation effects, are sequentially executed. After that, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply at the timing 75AKT11, the setting change is performed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the characteristic part 74AK controls the setting change state. Since the start command is received, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined in step 75AKS007 whether or not to end the setting change. However, if the setting is not ended at this time, the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. It In the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, if it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start motion is detected. In this way, in the setting change state as the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the confirmation effect start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting effect confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change, is started. In this way, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. After that, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15 after the timing 75AKT14, it is determined that the setting change is ended at the step 75AKS007 in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK. As a result, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed subsequent to steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, similarly to the case of the characteristic part 74AK, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. Good. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected during the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control processing executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control processing. If it is determined that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps to execute the confirmation effect. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the control is executed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition when the setting change state is permitted to allow the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the state of the gaming machine accurately and to confirm the state of the gaming machine by making it possible to execute the confirmation effect when the setting is changed as the change permitted state. It can be prevented.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 75AKS001, the confirmation reception control processing similar to that of the characteristic portion 74AK is executed, thereby confirming acceptance. The period begins. During the confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation is detected without providing the confirmation acceptance period, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time in the setting change state as the change permission condition, so in order to prevent trouble in the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect can be performed together with the change of the setting value. You can do it properly.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 75AK, the control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed corresponding to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation acceptance control period is started by executing the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic portion 74AK. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period, which causes a hindrance to the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine. To prevent this, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation is detected, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Further, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic part 74AK is executed, and it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation is detected, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 75AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 75AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation compete with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work for checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 75AK for providing the gaming machine capable of preventing the trouble of the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can set any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25) that can progress the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different,
A setting control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting unit when power supply starts.
Production means capable of executing production (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means capable of executing the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during setting change of step 75AKS008). CPU120 for effect control for executing processing),
The confirmation control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of the setting effect confirmation effect control process in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered. ..

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means,
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033). , 74AKS036 execution, etc.),
In the change permission state, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect along with the change of the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, the step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018 execution),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 75AK,
It is provided with a game detecting means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting a motion by the player,
The confirmation effect condition is established based on the detection of the motion by the game detecting means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means common to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of the means A relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51) capable of detecting an operation related to setting,
An initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 executing steps AKS001, AKS002, etc.),
Change permission control means capable of controlling the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13),
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state and appropriately set the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means B relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51) capable of detecting an operation related to setting,
Initialization detecting means (for example, clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization,
When an operation is not detected by the setting detection means and an operation is detected by the initialization detection means when the power supply is started, the initialization notification is executed together with the start of the power supply while the power supply is started. When an operation is detected by the setting detecting means, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, for effect control for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) CPU 120, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the initialization notification and appropriately set the set value.

As a gaming machine of means C relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 29 or the like) capable of displaying information on a game value given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area,
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A),
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the setting value can be appropriately set without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means D relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
Production detecting means capable of detecting an operation relating to the output amount of the production (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 etc.),
Display control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes step AKS026) that displays the display of the set value by the setting means in preference to the display of the output amount of the effect,
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the change work of the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means E relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
Production control means for controlling execution of production based on information from the game control means (for example, production control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015),
In the change permission state, the effect control means limits the control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing AKS027. ) And
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble and set the setting value appropriately.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature portions combined in this way or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to other feature portions. For example, regarding the characteristic part 71AK, regarding the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and regarding the characteristic part 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the power-on command process. Regarding the configuration of the production control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed and the characteristic portion 73AK, the control for performing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined that the setting change is finished in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing. Regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic part 74AK, the setting control is executed in the step 75AKS008 of the power-on command process regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 for effect control and the characteristic part 75AK which executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process. The configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process may be a combination of some or all of them as appropriate.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic parts 229F to 233F)
Next, the characteristic parts 229F to 233F of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic parts 229F to 233F of the present embodiment, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. Has been done. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, the set value 1 has the highest payout rate, and the higher the value in the set value 1, the set value 2 and the set value 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the higher the value in the order of the set value 2 and the set value 3, the lower the advantage gradually. The set value may be provided in three or more steps. Also, the advantage may increase as the number increases.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 229F of the present embodiment, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. As an example, the jackpot winning probability is 1/99 for the set value 1, 1/150 for the set value 2, and 1/200 for the set value 3. The setting value 3 is a setting value in which the lowest winning probability of a big jackpot is set among a plurality of types of setting values, and is called a low setting. The set value 1 and the set value 2 are set values for which the jackpot winning probability and the like higher than the set value 3 for the low setting are set, and are called high setting (change setting). Note that the setting value 3 may be used as a normal setting that is basically used, and each of the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 may be used as a changed setting (high setting) changed from the normal setting.

Regarding the characteristic portions 229F to 232F, the number of rounds is 15 times as the type of the big hit game state executed when the display result of the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 becomes the specific display result (big hit display result). An example including a 15 round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as 15R jackpot) and a 5 round jackpot with 5 rounds (hereinafter referred to as 5R jackpot) will be described. The 15R jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot because the number of rounds is larger than that of the 5R jackpot and more winning balls (balls) can be expected than the 5R jackpot. In the following description, "round" may be indicated using the word "R".

The big hit game state is a game state that is controlled when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) becomes the big hit display result (big symbol symbol), and the game ball can be won. An open state (a first state that is advantageous to the player) and a closed state (a second state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state) in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to win (including difficulty in winning) For the player, by opening and closing the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 as the variable winning means that can be changed to, the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times such as 15 rounds and 5 rounds. It is in an advantageous state.

[Explanation on Characteristic Section 229F]
Next, the characteristic part 229F of the present embodiment will be described. In the characteristic part 229F, of the first big hit game state and the second big hit game state, which are advantageous conditions for the player, for example, the first big hit game which has a higher advantage for the player due to a large number of rounds. In the state, an example of effect control that enables the special effect to be executed will be described. As the special effect, for example, an effect such as an effect of highlighting that the predetermined game state is set at the start of the predetermined game state such as the start of each round of the big hit game state is executed.

In the characteristic part 229F, as the movable body 32 which is drive-controlled by the effect control CPU 120 in FIG. 2, a plurality of movable accessory objects that move in front of the image display device 5 are provided. Specifically, as the movable accessory, an upper movable accessory that is provided above the image display device 5 and moves up and down in front of the image display device 5, and an image display device 5 that is provided below the image display device 5. A lower movable accessory that moves up and down in front, a left movable accessory that is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 and moves left and right in front of the image display device 5, and a right side of the image display device 5. There are provided four movable accessory objects which are provided on one side and which are movable right and left in front of the image display device 5 and which are right movable accessory objects. These movable accessory objects are drive-controlled by the production control CPU 120. All of these movable accessory parts are provided in a form of being housed inside a center decoration member that surrounds the image display device 5 in a standby state. It appears in front of the image display device 5.

FIG. 9-1 is an effect explanatory diagram including a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the effect of the special effect related to the characteristic part 229F. In FIG. 9-1, (A) ~ (F) shows the effect mode in the big hit game state of 15R big hit, (G) ~ (L) shows the effect mode in the big hit game state of 5R big hit. ing.

The length of the interval period between rounds differs between the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot. In the interval period, in the special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit game state, the special winning opening is closed during the period from the end of the previous open state one time before to the start of the next open state. It is a period. For example, the 15R big hit interval period is 3 seconds, the 5R big hit interval period is 2 seconds, and the 15R big hit interval period with a large number of rounds is set to be longer. The reason why the interval period differs depending on the type of big hit is to suppress the excessive payout number of prize balls within a predetermined unit period. In other words, if the interval period is changed according to the type of big hit, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from increasing due to an excessively high speed at which the player can obtain a prize ball in the big hit game state. ..

In the 5R big hit, for example, as shown in (G), (J), (L), at the start of each round in the big hit game state, "1R", "2R", "5R" are shown in the figure. The number-of-rounds image indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a relatively small size in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a series of predetermined large-hit mid-range effects images are displayed. Then, in the 5R jackpot, for example, as in (I) and (K), a series of predetermined jackpot performance images are displayed in the interval period between each round in the jackpot gaming state.

The effect in the big hit game state such as executed in the 5R big hit is a basic normal effect. On the other hand, in the effect in the big hit game state executed in the 15R big hit, a special effect is executed as described below.

In the 15R jackpot, special effects are executed at the start of each round in the jackpot gaming state, for example, as in (A), (D), and (F). As a special effect, the round number image showing the number of rounds such as “1LUCKY”, “2LUCKY”, and “15LUCKY” in the figure by numbers and the letters “LUCKY” is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The special image 229F001, which is an image that is displayed in a larger size than the round number image in the case of a 5R big hit, and that displays an aura image that emits light in a predetermined shape around the round number image on almost the entire screen. Is displayed.

In each round of the 15R jackpot, after the special image 229F001 as shown in (A) is displayed for a predetermined period at the start, the special image 229F001 is erased as shown in (B) and, for example, "1LUCKY" is displayed. A round number image indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a relatively small size in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, in the 15R jackpot, for example, as in (C) and (E), the movable winning object is operated in the interval period between each round in the jackpot gaming state, so that the set value of the above jackpot winning probability, etc. However, the interval period setting suggesting effect as the setting suggesting effect that suggests which of the set values 1 to 3 is set is executed. The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of a predetermined game such as the end of a round in the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player to the start of the next predetermined game such as the start of the next round, that is, , It is the period during which the big prize hole is closed between rounds.

Note that, as the special effect, an example involving a round number image indicating the number of rounds is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special image may be displayed separately from the round number image. ..

In the interval period setting suggesting effect, the movable accessory selected from the above-mentioned four types of movable accessory is used. (C) shows an example in which the upper movable accessory 229F002 moves downward during the interval period between the 1R and 2R rounds. (E) shows an example in which the lower movable accessory 229F003 moves upward during the interval period between the other rounds.

In the 15R big hit, for example, as in (C) and (E), during the interval period between each round in the big hit game state, an image of a movable accessory selected from a plurality of types as an interval period setting suggestive effect is displayed. An effect of moving in front of the display device 5 is performed.

The movable accessory that has moved in front of the image display device 5 is returned to the standby position at the end of the interval period. In addition, the timing at which the operated movable accessory 229F002 returns may be during the interval period.

As the moving effect of the movable accessory in the interval period setting suggesting effect, an effect of "moving the upper movable accessory", an effect of "moving the lower movable accessory", and an effect of "moving the left movable accessory" , An effect of "moving the right movable accessory" or an effect of "moving all the movable accessory" can be selected. The kind of movable accessory that operates during the interval period between each round is selected according to the set value (set value 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. different. In this way, since the selection ratio of the movable accessory to be moved is different depending on the set value (the set values 1 to 3) of the big hit probability, the operation of the selected movable accessory has the set value of the big hit probability and the like. It can be an action that suggests a setting. As a result, during the interval period between each round, the interval period setting suggestion suggests which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value such as the jackpot probability is set to, depending on the type of the movable accessory that operates. A performance is performed.

As shown in FIG. 9A, in the 15R big hit, the movable display member 5 selected from a plurality of types is displayed as the interval period setting suggesting effect during the interval period between each round in the big hit game state. Since the effect of moving in front of is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the interval period between rounds that is set longer than when the 5R big hit is long.

As an example of performing the interval period setting suggestive effect using the movable accessory, as described above, the selection ratio of the movable accessory to be operated among the multiple types of movable accessory is changed according to the set value. Although the example in which the effect of suggesting the set value is given is shown, the invention is not limited to this, and as another example, the following interval period setting suggestive effect may be executed. For example, depending on the set value, the effect of suggesting the set value may be provided by changing the selection ratio of a plurality of types of operation modes (movement speed, movement pattern, deformation pattern, etc.) of each movable accessory. .. Further, when performing the interval period setting suggestion effect using a movable accessory provided with a light emitter, the effect suggesting the set value may be performed by changing the selection ratio of a plurality of types of light emission modes. .. Further, when performing the interval period setting suggestion effect using a movable accessory having an image display device, the effect suggesting the set value is provided by changing the selection ratio of the display modes of the plurality of types of images. May be. Further, various effects using these movable accessory objects may be appropriately combined and executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a diagram showing in table form an interval period setting suggestion effect determination table used for selecting an effect type of setting suggestion effect executed in the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state of 15R jackpot. is there. The interval period setting suggestive effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

In FIG. 9-2, the correspondence relationship between the effect type of the setting suggestion effect (type of movable winning object) executed as the interval period setting suggestion effect and the allocation of the interval period setting suggestion effect selection random number (displayed in %) is shown. , The set value 1 is set, the set value 2 is set, and the set value 3 is set. The interval period setting suggesting effect selectable random number is an effect selecting random number updated by the effect control CPU 120. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the operation types of the movable accessory to be operated in the interval period setting suggesting effect are "movement of upper movable accessory", "movement of lower movable accessory", and "movement of left movable accessory". ”, “Move right movable accessory”, and “Move all movable accessory”.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selecting the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable accessory” is 90% or more for each of the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3. Basically, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable accessory” is selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable accessory” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3”. With these, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable accessory” is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratios at which the setting suggestive effect “moving the movable accessory other than the setting suggestive effect of “moving the upper movable accessory”” is selected are set value 1, set value 2, Also, each of the set values 3 is 10% or less. The rate at which the setting suggestive effect of “moving the lower movable accessory” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving the lower movable accessory” is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the left movable accessory” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 3<setting value 1<setting value 2”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect operation of "moving the left movable accessory" is performed, the ratio of the set value 2 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the right movable accessory” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 3<setting value 2<setting value 1”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving the right movable accessory” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 1 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the proportions in which the setting suggestive effect of "moving all movable accessory" is selected have a relationship of "setting value 2, 3 <setting value 1", and setting value 2, In case of 3, it is 0%. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "moving all movable accessory" is performed, it is determined that the setting value is 1.

Then, according to FIG. 9-2, a setting suggestion effect of "moving the lower movable accessory" other than the setting suggesting effect of "moving the upper movable accessory", a setting of "moving the left movable accessory" Each of the suggestive effect, the setting suggestive effect of "moving the right movable accessory", and the setting suggestive effect of "moving all the movable accessory" is set higher than the setting value 3 which is the low setting. The set value 1 or the set value 2 is high. As a result, a setting suggestive effect of "moving a lower movable accessory" other than a setting suggesting effect of "moving an upper movable accessory", a setting suggestive effect of "moving a left movable accessory", and a "right movable actor" When the setting suggestion effect of "moving an object" and the setting suggestion effect of "moving all movable accessory objects" are performed, it is expected that the setting is higher than the low setting.

When a movable accessory is selected by using the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-2, basically, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable accessory” is selected with a high frequency and is operated. A setting suggestion that is displayed as a character and that "moves the lower movable accessory" at a lower frequency than a setting suggestion that "moves the upper movable accessory", a setting suggestion that "moves the left movable accessory" Any one of the effect, the setting suggestion effect of "moving the right movable accessory", and the setting suggestion effect of "moving all the movable accessory" is selected.

Regarding the setting suggestion effect by the movement of the movable accessory set in the interval period setting suggestion effect table of FIG. 9-2, any of the movable accessory objects of the upper, lower, left and right (including the operation of all the movable accessory objects) Although it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the action is performed, in order to make the player pay more attention to the setting suggestion effect by the movable accessory, for example, with respect to a plurality of types of operation patterns by the movable accessory, up, down, left, and right. It is also possible to set an operation pattern in which a plurality of movable accessory objects are moved in stages, such as moving the movable accessory objects in sequence. For example, an operation pattern is set so that the upper, lower, left, and right movable accessories move stepwise in the order of top → bottom → left → right, and after the top movable accessory first moves, other movable accessories Should be operated in order. In this way, a high setting is set depending on the stage at which a plurality of types of movable auditors operate after the upper movable auditors having a small difference between the set value 1 to the installation value 3 operates. It is possible to make a setting suggestion that confirms that. This allows the player to pay attention to the action of the movable accessory that seems to have little influence on the suggestion of the set value, such as the upper movable accessory that normally operates all the time. In this way, by performing the setting suggestion effect in which the movable accessory is operated stepwise over a certain effect time, it is possible for the player not to worry about it even if the interval period becomes long. it can.

In this way, in the interval period setting suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest which set value is set by the operation pattern of the movable accessory. Depending on the type of movable accessory to be operated in the setting suggestion effect, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the setting is high and the degree of expectation as to which of the set values 1 to 3 are different are different. It is possible to improve the expectation for the set value such as a big hit by the player by the effect of setting the interval period. Further, since it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous for the player depending on the type of the movable accessory to be operated in the setting suggestion effect, the interval period setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation of a set value such as a big hit by a person. Further, according to a set value (set value 1 to 3) such as a jackpot probability set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is constant for a plurality of movable accessory objects, but a combination of colors that the movable object emits to emit light. The selection ratio of may be different.

As for the movable accessory to be operated in the setting suggestion effect, only one type of movable accessory having a display section composed of a dot matrix LED is provided on the front side, and a plurality of types of shapes and colors are provided for each interval period between rounds. One of the images may be selected and displayed as the accessory image. Further, according to the set value (set value 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is constant in a plurality of character images, but the color combination of the character images is selected. You may make it a different ratio. As described below, the character image displayed by the movable character 229F002 during the interval period between the rounds is a set value (a set value 1 to a set value such as a jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). The selected ratio may be different depending on 3).

FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing a big hit start effect setting process. The big hit start production setting process receives a production control command that specifies to start the big hit game state, and when the big hit game state is started, a part of the process in the special figure hit waiting process (S173) of FIG. Is a process performed as.

First, when the production control CPU 120 receives a production control command that specifies a jackpot type for starting the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state to be started is a jackpot 15 round jackpot based on checking the received command. It is determined whether there is any (229FS001). When it is a 15-round big hit (Y in 229FS001), the CPU 120 for effect control performs highlighting as a special effect at the start of each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), and (F). The process table set to be executed is selected (229FS002), and the process ends. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process if the 15th round is not a big hit (N in 229FS001).

In 229FS002 in the big hit start effect setting process, when the process table set to execute the highlighting as the special effect at the start of the round is selected, the process table is changed to the process table in the big hit medium effect process of FIG. Based on the set data, highlighting as a special effect is executed at the start of each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), and (F).

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an interval effect setting process. The interval effect setting process is a process performed as part of the process in the big hit medium effect process (S176) of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 is at the time of receiving a special winning opening after-designation command which is an effect control command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state. By confirming whether or not it is time to start closing the special winning opening (229FS005). This confirms whether or not it is the start of the interval period between each round.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the time to receive the designated command after opening the special winning opening (Y in 229FS005), it determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state being executed is the jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds of jackpots. (229FS006). When the CPU 120 for effect control is in the 15-round big hit game state (Y in 229FS006), the random number for effect selection of the interval period setting suggestion effect is extracted and the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-2 is used. As described above, the type of interval period setting suggestive effect according to the current set value (setting values 1 to 3) is determined, and data setting for executing the determined interval period setting suggestive effect is performed (229FS007), The process ends. On the other hand, if the 15th round is not a big hit (N in 229FS006), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the effect that was being executed in the previous round (229FS008) as the normal interval effect, and executes the process. finish.

In 229FS007 in the big hit start effect setting process, when the type of the interval period setting suggesting effect is determined and data is set to execute the determined interval period setting suggesting effect, in the big hit medium effect process of FIG. Based on the data set in 229FS007, the interval period setting suggesting effect is executed in the interval period between each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1(C) and (E).

[Holding continuous suggestion production based on the motion pattern of movable parts]
In the interval period of each round, whether or not the pending storage information (holding information) that is a big hit is included in the pending storage information (holding storage information that is what is called a holding series) (whether or not it is a holding series). When pre-reading processing is performed and the pending storage information that is a big hit is included, the operation pattern is selected from the operation patterns of a plurality of types of movable accessory shown in FIG. By operating, the effect control CPU 120 may execute an effect (holding consecutive suggestion effect) that suggests that the held storage information that is a big hit is included. For example, as the selection table for selecting the motion pattern of the movable accessory, use a data table in which the data distribution of the motion pattern selection is set so that the high setting is confirmed unless the pending consecutive suggestion effect is executed. Alternatively, the operation pattern of the movable accessory may be selected. Specifically, in the selection table for selecting the operation pattern of the movable accessory, as a special operation pattern, it is selected only when there is pending storage information that is a pending string when the setting is low, and when the setting is high, it is selected. It is only necessary to set the data distribution for selecting the operation pattern so that selection is made even if there is no pending storage information that is a pending sequence. By doing so, it is possible to make the high setting almost fixed unless the pending consecutive suggestion effect is executed. In this way, when the operation pattern of the movable accessory is selected, since the holding sequence is related to the effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game after the jackpot gaming state is completed. In addition, as the continuous suggestion effect by the operation pattern of the movable accessory, it may be executed during the round in addition to the interval period of each round, or may not be executed during the interval period of each round. It may be executed (at the end of the big hit game state).

[Setting suggestion with character image]
In addition, a plurality of types of character images can be selectively displayed along with the above-mentioned special effect image or included in the special effect image, and the setting suggestion effect is controlled by the type of the displayed character image. It may be made to execute by CPU120 for. In that case, the selection ratio of the type of character image may be changed according to the set values 1 to 3. When performing the setting suggestion effect depending on the type of the character image to be displayed, in the interval period of each round, the action of the movable accessory selected as described above and the display of the character image thus selected are performed. You may make it suggest a setting suggestion.

As the big hit game state, an example is shown in which a predetermined game for opening the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeated for a predetermined period, but as the predetermined game, other than the special variable winning ball device 7. You may make it control to repeat the predetermined game which opens the winning opening.

Further, as the special effect, an example in which it is executed only when the 15R big hit, which is advantageous to the player, is shown, but the special effect is not limited to this, and it may be executed also when the 5R big hit. That is, the special effect may be executed regardless of the type of jackpot. Thus, as a special effect, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the jackpot may be performed for some jackpot types or for all jackpot types. Further, when performing a special effect in a jackpot game state of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player who performs the special effect may be one type or a plurality of types. May be.

Further, the setting of the jackpot probability and the like is not limited to three kinds such as the set value 1 to the set value 3, and various kinds of set values such as 10 kinds may be provided.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 229F will be described.
[1] Of the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot, in the jackpot gaming state of the 15R jackpot which is advantageous to the player, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (D), at the start of each round as a predetermined game Since a special effect including an effect that highlights that the 15R big hit is being executed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect regarding the round in the big hit game state.

[2] As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F), (G) to (L), each round as a predetermined game is a big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state. Is a state in which the game is executed a predetermined number of times in the open state, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the production regarding the game round in the big hit game state.

[3] Since the big hit game state controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes the big hit display result is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the display result of the variable display is obtained by executing the special effect. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect in the game state controlled when the big hit display result is obtained.

[4] As shown in FIG. 9-1, since the interval period between rounds (3 seconds) in the 15R jackpot is longer than the interval period between rounds (2 seconds) in the 5R jackpot, it is advantageous in a short period in the 15R jackpot. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high due to too many states (a state in which a prize can be won).

[5] Like the movable character objects 229F002 and 229F003 in FIGS. 9-1(D) and (F), the movable character object can be moved by the effect type selected from FIG. 9-2 during the interval period between the rounds. Since the accessory is operated, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation of the movable accessory during the interval period between each round.

[6] As shown in FIG. 9-2, since the selection rate of the interval period setting suggestive effect type by the movable accessory is different between the set value 1 and the set value 3, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation pattern of the movable object. it can.

[7] As shown in FIG. 9-2, the selection ratio of the interval period setting suggestive effect type by the movable accessory is different between the set value 1 and the set value 3, so that the operation pattern of the movable object can be focused.

[8] As described in [Setting suggestion effect by character image], depending on the type of character image displayed together with the special effect, as shown in FIG. 9-2, any of the setting values 1 to 3 can be set. Since it is possible to suggest whether the character image has been set, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the character image.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 229F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 229F, conventionally, as a gaming machine which displays a round regarding a round game as a predetermined game a plurality of times during a big hit game state as an advantageous state, one disclosed in JP-A-2016-101442 is disclosed. is there. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-101442, only the round display regarding the round game as the predetermined game is displayed, and there is room for improvement in the effect regarding the predetermined game. Therefore, as a game machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 230F for providing a game machine capable of improving the interest of the production related to the predetermined game,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) a plurality of times,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (15R big hit, etc.) and a second advantageous state (5R big hit, etc.) which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, a special effect that is not executed in the second advantageous state at the start of the predetermined game (a special effect including an effect that highlights that it is a 15R big hit in FIGS. 9A and 9D). Etc.) (features 229F etc.),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the start of the predetermined game, the interest of the effect regarding the predetermined game can be improved.

As a game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 229F,
The predetermined game can be changed to a first state (open state or the like) in which a game medium (game ball or the like) can be won and a second state (closed state or the like) in which the game medium is difficult or unable to win a prize. Regarding the means (special variable winning ball device 7 or the like), when it is controlled to the advantageous state, a game round (round or the like) for controlling from the second state to the first state is performed a predetermined number of times (15 times or 5 times, etc.). ) Is a game to be executed (FIG. 9-1 (A) to (F), (G) to (L), etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect regarding the game round.

As a game machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 229F,
The advantageous state is a gaming state (big hit gaming state, etc.) controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit display result, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect in the gaming state controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result.

As a game machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 229F,
A period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 3 seconds, etc.) is from the end of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state. Longer than the period until the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 2 seconds, etc.) (Fig. 9-1, etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high due to the first advantageous state becoming too advantageous in a short period of time.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 229F,
A movable movable object (movable accessory objects 229F002, 229F003, etc. in FIG. 9-2),
The movable object is operated during a period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (movable accessory 229F002, (D), (F) of FIG. 9-1). 229F003, etc.) further comprises movable object operating means,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, the operation of the movable object can be focused on during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic part 229F,
The gaming machine is capable of advancing the game so that the degree of advantage (big hit probability, etc.) for the player varies depending on the set value (set value 1-set value 3, etc.) consisting of a plurality of stages.
It is possible to suggest which set value is set by the motion pattern of the movable object (as shown in FIG. 9-2, setting value 1 to set value 3 selects the setting suggestion effect type by the movable accessory). Different proportions, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, the operation pattern of the movable object can be focused on.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 relating to the characteristic part 229F,
Holding storage means (RAM 102 or the like) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding storage information;
Determining means (S110 or the like in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to set the advantageous state based on the pending storage information;
Before the determination of the determination means, a determination means (S101 or the like in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to set the advantageous state is further provided.
In the advantageous state, if the pending storage information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the pending storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state. Can be suggested by the operation pattern of the movable object ([retention pending suggestion effect by the operation pattern of the movable accessory], etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, the operation pattern of the movable object can be focused on.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 relating to the characteristic part 229F,
The gaming machine is capable of proceeding with a game such that the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on a set value (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) consisting of a plurality of stages,
It is possible to suggest which setting value is set depending on the type of the predetermined image (character image) displayed together with the special effect ([setting suggestion effect by character image]),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 7 according to the characteristic part 229F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the type of the predetermined image.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control relating to the setting of the characteristic portion 71AK to the characteristic portion 75AK and the control relating to the effect of the characteristic portion 229F may be combined.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 230F]
Next, the characteristic part 230F of the present embodiment will be described. In the characteristic portion 230F, a period from the end of a predetermined game such as the end of a round in the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player to the start of the next predetermined game such as the start of the next round, that is, During the interval period between rounds, it is possible to execute an interval period setting suggesting effect that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 3 the setting value such as the above-mentioned jackpot winning probability is set to by image display. An example of effect control will be described.

In the characteristic part 229F of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-1, an example in which the interval period setting suggesting effect is executed by operating the upper movable accessory 229F002 during the interval period between each round in the big hit game state showed that. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 230F, during the interval period between the rounds in the big hit game state, the character image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the movable accessory, without operating the movable accessory 229F002. , Interval period setting suggestive effect can be executed.

As the character images displayed for executing the interval period setting suggesting effect on the image display device 5 during the interval period between each round, there are a plurality of types of character images of different types, that is, a character A image to a character D image. The character image selected from the above is used.

FIG. 9-5 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an interval period setting suggesting effect determination table used for selecting a character image to be displayed in the interval period between each round in the jackpot gaming state of the 15R jackpot. The interval period setting suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 9-5 is stored in the ROM 121.

In FIG. 9-5, the correspondence between the type of character image displayed in the interval period setting suggestive effect and the allocation of random numbers for interval period setting suggestive effect selection (displayed in %) is set to the set value 1. At the time, the setting value 2 is set, and the setting value 3 is set. The random number for effect selection of the interval period setting suggesting effect is a random number for effect selection updated by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the types of character images displayed in the interval period setting suggesting effect are “character A image”, “character B image”, “character C image”, “character D image”, and “character D image”. Images of all characters (all character images of characters A to D) are included.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio of selecting the setting suggestive effect for displaying the “character A image” is 90% or more for each of the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3. The setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is selected at an extremely high ratio. As shown in FIG. 9-5, the rate at which the setting suggestive effect for displaying the “character A image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3”. With these, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character A image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the rate at which the setting suggestive effect displaying the character image other than the setting suggesting effect displaying the “character A image” is selected is set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3. Is less than 10%. The rate at which the setting suggestive effect for displaying the “character B image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character B image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character C image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 3<setting value 1<setting value 2”. As a result, when the “character C image” is displayed, the ratio of the set value 2 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9C, the ratio of selecting the “character D image” has a relationship of “setting value 3<setting value 2<setting value 1”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character D image” is displayed, the ratio of the setting value 1 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9C, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying “all character images” has a relationship of “setting values 2 and 3<setting value 1”, and setting values 2 and 3 are 0. %. As a result, it is determined that the setting value is 1 when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the "character all image" is performed.

And according to FIG. 9-5, the setting suggestion production which displays "character B" other than the setting suggestion production which displays "character A image", the setting suggestion production which displays "character C image", and "character D". With respect to each of the setting suggestion effect that displays "and all the character images", the ratio of the setting value 2 that is the high setting value or the setting value 3 is higher than the setting value 1 that is the low setting value. high. As a result, a setting suggestion effect that displays a "character B image" other than the setting suggestion effect that displays the "character A image", a setting suggestion effect that displays a "character C image", and a setting suggestion that displays a "character D image" When each of the effect and the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character all image” is displayed, the high degree of expectation is higher than the low setting.

When the type of the setting suggestion effect for displaying the character image is selected using the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-5, basically, the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is executed frequently. Then, the setting suggesting effect of displaying the "character B image", the setting suggesting effect of displaying the "character C image", and the "character D image" are displayed at a lower frequency than the setting suggesting effect of displaying the "character A image". Either the setting suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “all character image” is executed. Depending on the type of character image, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the setting is high is different, and the degree of expectation as to which one of the setting values 1 to 3 is applicable is different. Therefore, by the interval period setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. It is possible to improve the expectation for the set value such as a big hit by the player. Further, depending on the type of the character image, it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, by the interval period setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation.

In the characteristic part 230F of the present embodiment, the jackpot start effect setting process of FIG. 9-3 and the interval effect setting process of FIG. 9-4 are executed in the same manner as described in the characteristic part 229F. In the production of the 15R jackpot jackpot game state shown in FIGS. 9A to 9E, the character image is used from the production using the movable accessory 229F002 for the interval period setting suggestive production during the interval period. It is possible to execute with the production pattern replaced with the existing production.

[Execution frequency control of setting suggestion production according to the situation where the big hit game state is controlled]
Next, with respect to the interval period setting suggesting effect, an example in which the execution frequency of the effect is changed depending on the situation where the big hit game state is controlled will be described. As the above-mentioned interval period setting suggestive effect, an example in which it is always executed in the interval period of each round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for each round, when the result of the lottery is to select and execute the interval period setting suggesting effect by a lottery, as shown in FIG. 9-2 or 9-5. The effect type of the interval period setting suggestive effect during the interval period may be selected using a different interval period setting suggestive effect determination table. In that case, as described below, the execution frequency of the effect may be changed according to the situation where the big hit game state is controlled. For example, the current time is confirmed by a timekeeping device such as a real-time clock provided on a pachinko gaming machine, and an interval period setting suggestion effect is produced in a predetermined period when the game store is opened (so-called first in the morning) than in other periods. The percentage of choosing to perform may be higher. In addition, the number of consecutive games in the pachinko gaming machine (the number of consecutive big hits, for example, the probability change state, and the event that the big hit occurs during the special game state after the big hit game state such as a shortened state The number of consecutive times) may be counted, and the rate of selecting to execute the interval period setting suggesting effect may be increased as the number of consecutive holidays increases.

[Setting suggestion production during the interval period between specific rounds]
The setting suggesting effect (effect by movable accessory, effect by character image) executed in the interval period between the rounds shown in the characteristic part 229F and the characteristic part 230F is executed between the respective rounds (all the rounds). .. However, the setting suggestive effect executed in the interval period between the rounds may be executed in a part of all the rounds, for example, only in the interval period between the 5R and 6R rounds. Good.

As the interval period setting suggestive effect, at least one of the effect by the action of the movable accessory as shown in FIG. 9A and the effect by the image display of the character image as shown in FIG. 9-5 may be executed. Therefore, as the interval period setting suggesting effect, any one of the effect only by the operation of the movable accessory, the effect only by the image display, and the effect by combining the operation of the movable accessory and the image display are performed. You may execute.

As an example of executing the interval period setting suggesting effect using the character image, an effect using a plurality of different types of character images has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one character image is used, and a plurality of character images are used. It is also possible to perform an action that suggests the set value by operating in different types of action modes and changing the selection ratio of a plurality of types of action modes for one character image according to the set value.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 230F will be described.
[1] In the interval period between rounds in the big hit game state, as a setting suggestion effect of which setting value among the setting value 1 to the setting value 3 is set, the movable combination of FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2 The interval period setting suggesting effect of moving an object or the interval period setting suggesting effect of displaying the character image of FIG. 9-5 can be executed as shown in FIGS. 9-1(C) and (E). It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect during the interval period between the rounds of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with.

As described above, a plurality of movable winning objects are provided, but an effect that suggests whether the number of the set value such as the jackpot probability is an even number or an odd number may be executed by combining the actions of the winning objects. For example, if the set values are set values 1 to 6 and the two movable accessory objects are operated, it is suggested that the settings are odd numbers such as set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5. However, when four movable accessory objects are operated, it may be suggested that the setting is an even number such as the setting value 2, the setting value 4, and the setting value 6.

[2] In FIG. 9-2 and FIG. 9-5, since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects are different depending on the setting values 1 to 3, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of setting suggesting effects. , The interest of the game can be further improved.

[3] As shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) to (F) and 229FS007 of FIG. 9-4, the 15R jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the 15R jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player, among the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot Since the interval period setting suggesting effect is executed while being performed, it is possible to focus on the effect executed when being controlled to the 15R big hit jackpot gaming state.

[4] As shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) and 9(D), since a special effect including an effect that highlights that the 15R jackpot is highlighted can be executed at the start of a round, the interval period between the rounds is related. The interest of the production can be further improved.

[5] As shown in FIG. 9-1, the interval period between rounds in the 15R jackpot (3 seconds) is longer than the interval period between rounds in the 5R jackpot (2 seconds). It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high due to too many states (a state in which a prize can be won).

[6] Since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the situation when the jackpot game state is controlled, as shown in [Control frequency of setting suggestion effect depending on the situation when the jackpot game state is controlled] Since the situation when being controlled to the big hit game state is also added to the production, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[7] As shown in [Execution frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to situation controlled to big hit game state], in an interval period between specific rounds such as between rounds of 5R and 6R, an interval period Since the suggestive effect can be executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect during a specific round.

[8] As shown in FIG. 9-6, which will be described later, the over-winning setting suggesting effect may be executable in association with the over-winning in each round. In that case, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the production when more game balls than the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes in each round enter the special variable winning prize ball device 7.
[9] As will be described later in [Execution example of over-winning setting suggesting effect in an interval period between rounds], when the over-winning setting suggesting effect is also executed, the interval period setting suggesting effect and the over-winning setting suggesting effect When the execution periods of and are overlapped, any setting suggestion effect can be executed, so that each setting suggestion effect is surely executed even when the execution timings of a plurality of setting suggestion effects overlap. , The interest of the game can be improved.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIG. 9-5 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control regarding the setting of the characteristic portion 71AK to the characteristic portion 75AK and the control regarding the effect of the characteristic portion 230F may be combined.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 230F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 230F, conventionally, there is a game machine whose setting value can be changed, which is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that executes an effect during an interval period between the end of a round game as a plurality of predetermined games during the jackpot game state as an advantageous state and the start of the next round game, JP 2013 There is one described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 252283. However, in the techniques described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2013-252283 A, during the period from the end of the predetermined game of the gaming machine provided with the set value to the start of the next predetermined game. There was room for improvement in the production. Therefore, the feature section 230F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the production during the period from the end of the predetermined game of the gaming machine provided with the set value to the start of the next predetermined game is concerned. As a gaming machine of means 1,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of advancing the game so that the degree of advantage (big hit probability, etc.) for the player is different based on the set value (set value 1-set value 3, etc.). With and
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) a plurality of times,
During the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds), a setting suggestion effect of which setting value is set (FIG. 9-1, FIG. 9-2) The interval period setting suggestive effect of moving the movable accessory of FIG. 9, the interval period setting suggestive effect of performing the setting suggestive effect of displaying the character image of FIG. 9-5, etc. can be executed (FIG. 9-1(C), ( E) etc.),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the performance during the period from the end of the predetermined game of the gaming machine provided with the set value to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic portion 230F,
The execution ratios of the plurality of types of setting suggestive effects are different according to the set values (in FIG. 9-2 and FIG. 9-5, the selection ratios of the plurality of types of setting suggestive effects are different depending on the setting values 1 to 3). Different, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 230F.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the type of setting suggestion effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (15R big hit, etc.) and a second advantageous state (5R big hit, etc.) which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first advantageous state (FIGS. 9A to 9F, 229FS007 and the like in FIG. 9-4),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 230F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the effect that is executed when the first advantageous state is controlled.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
In the first advantageous state, a special effect can be executed at the start of the predetermined game (FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 230F.
According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the start of the predetermined game, the interest of the effect regarding the predetermined game can be improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 230F,
A period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 3 seconds, etc.) is from the end of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state. Longer than the period until the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 2 seconds, etc.) (Fig. 9-1, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 3 or the means 4 according to the characteristic part 230F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high due to the first advantageous state becoming too advantageous in a short period of time.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the situation when controlled to the advantageous state ([execution frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to the situation controlled to the big hit game state]),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic portion 230F.
According to such a configuration, the situation when controlled to an advantageous state is also taken into consideration, so that the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed during a period from the end of the specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an interval period between rounds between 5R and 6R). Setting suggestion production in the interval period between specific rounds] etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 6 according to the characteristic part 230F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 related to the characteristic portion 230F,
Variable winning means (special variable winning) capable of changing between a first state (open state) in which a game medium (game ball etc.) can win and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot win or cannot win a prize Ball device 7 etc.),
When a predetermined number (upper limit value of the number of prizes) of game media is won to the variable winning means, the variable winning means is controlled from the first state to the second state (variable winning control CPU 120). And further,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed in connection with the fact that more than a predetermined number of game media have won the variable winning means (over prize) (over prize setting suggestion effect of FIG. 9-6),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 6 according to the characteristic part 230F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect when more than a predetermined number of game media enter the variable winning means.

As a gaming machine of the means 9 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
More than the predetermined number and the setting suggestion effect (interval period setting suggestion effect, etc.) executed in the period (interval period between rounds, etc.) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game If the execution timing overlaps with the setting suggestion effect (over prize setting suggestion effect, etc.) executed in association with the game medium winning the variable winning means (over prize win, etc.), any of the setting suggestions Performance can also be executed ([execution example of over-win prize setting suggestion performance in the interval period between rounds]),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 8 related to the characteristic part 230F.
With such a configuration, even if the execution timings of a plurality of setting suggestion effects are overlapped, each setting suggestion effect is surely executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Explanation on Characteristic Section 231F]
Next, the characteristic part 231F of the present embodiment will be described. In each round of the big hit game state, the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and the game ball can be won in the special variable winning ball device 7. For each round in the big hit game state, an upper limit value is set for the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning ball device 7, and when the upper limit value is reached, the special winning opening is closed, but the upper limit value is set for the winning number. Depending on the game ball that is won before it is determined that the winning limit is exceeded, a prize exceeding the upper limit may occur in each round.

Such winning of a game ball that exceeds the upper limit of the number of winning prizes in each round is called an over-winning. When it is determined that an over-winning has occurred, it is possible to execute an over-winning effect, which is a specific effect related to the occurrence of an over-winning, such as notifying that an over-winning has occurred. For over-prize performance, multiple types of over-prize performance are provided, for each round, the type of over-prize performance is selected each time an over-prize occurs, and the performance control for executing the selected over-prize performance is for performance control. It is executed by the CPU 120.

In the characteristic part 231F, in addition to the occurrence of an over-winning as the over-winning effect, it is possible to suggest which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value of the above-mentioned jackpot winning probability or the like is set. An example will be described in which a prize setting suggestion effect is executed, and for the over-winning setting suggestion effect, the execution rate (selection rate) of the effect provided for the effect type is different according to the setting values 1 to 3 such as the winning probability of the big hit. .. Such an over-winning setting suggesting effect is executed during the interval period between the rounds immediately after the over-winning occurs.

FIG. 9-6 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the over-winning setting suggesting effect related to the characteristic part 231F.

9-6, the production mode of the over-prize setting suggestive production in the image display device 5 when the setting value 3 which is a low setting is set in (A) to (C), and (D) to The production mode of the over-winning setting suggesting production in the image display device 5 when the high setting value 1 is set in (F) is shown.

As shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the interval period between rounds, a predetermined character image 231F001 is displayed and the character image is displayed. In a mode like a dialogue issued by 231F001, a normal image 231F002 in which the character "Lucky!" is displayed, a high setting suggestion image 231F003 in which the character "Chance!" is displayed, and a character "Excellent!" are displayed. The over-winning setting suggestion image selected and determined from the high setting confirmation image 231F004 is displayed.

Regarding these over-winning prize setting suggestive images, as shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, the expected degree of high setting such as setting value 1 and setting value 2 is “normal image 231F002 (“lucky!”)<high setting. The selection ratios are set so that the suggestion image 231F003 (“Chance!”)<high setting confirmation image 231F004 (“Excellent!”). In particular, the high setting confirmation image 231F004 (“Excellent!”) is an over-winning setting suggestion image in which the high setting is confirmed.

In FIG. 9-6, for example, in the case of one over-winning in which one over-winning is detected in one round, as shown in (A) and (D), one over-winning Corresponding to, one over-winning setting suggestion image of any kind selected as described above is displayed. In (A) and (B), a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected is shown.

In FIG. 9-6, for example, when two over-winnings are detected in one round, two over-winnings are detected, as shown in (B) and (E). Corresponding to each of the above, two types of over-winning setting suggesting images of any kind selected as described above are displayed. In (B), a display example is shown in which the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed in the winning order corresponding to each of the two over-winning prizes. In (E), when the high setting suggestion image 231F003 is selected and displayed corresponding to the first over-winning, and then the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed corresponding to the second over-winning. The display example of is shown.

In FIG. 9-6, for example, when three over-winnings are detected in one round, three over-winnings are detected, as shown in (C) and (F). Corresponding to each of the above, three types of over-winning setting suggesting images of any kind selected as described above are displayed. In (C), a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed in the winning order corresponding to each of the three over-winning prizes is shown. In (F), the high setting confirmation image 231F004 is selected and displayed corresponding to the first over-winning, and then the normal image 231F002 is selected corresponding to each of the second and third over-winning. The example of the display when they are displayed in the winning order is shown.

In the case of three over-winnings in which three over-winnings are detected in one round shown in FIG. 9-6, as shown in (C) and (F), three over-winnings are won. Corresponding to each, three types of over-winning prize setting suggesting images of any kind selected as described above are displayed. In FIG. 9-6, when the high setting suggestion image 231F003 is displayed as in (E) or (F), the degree of expectation of the high setting is higher than when only the normal image 231F002 is displayed. The expectation of the person can be improved. Further, when the high setting confirmation image 231F004 is displayed, it is confirmed that the high setting is set, so that the player's expectation can be further improved.

For the over-winning prize setting suggesting effect, an effect in an effect mode in which the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission by the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the image display by the image display device 5 are combined is executed. You may do it. Further, for the over-winning setting suggesting effect, an effect may be executed by a combination of all or a part of the sound, the light emission, and the image, such as only the sound, only the light emission, or only the image. The effect may be performed by a single effect means. In the case of executing the over-winning setting suggesting effect using the light emitting body, the light emitting means such as a lamp provided at a predetermined position (for example, a position around the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening) is hit with a big hit. Light may be emitted in different colors (or different light emission patterns such as different blinking patterns may be used) according to the above-described set value such as probability.

FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an over-prize setting suggestion effect determination table used for selecting an effect type of the setting suggestion effect (type of over prize setting suggesting image) to be executed as the over-winning setting suggestion effect. is there. The over-win prize setting suggesting effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

In FIG. 9-7, when the over-winning setting suggesting effect determination table is the setting value 1, the first over-winning setting suggesting effect determination table (FIG. 9-7(A)) is set value 2. Second over-winning prize setting suggesting effect determination table (FIG. 9-7(B)) used for, and a third over-winning prize setting suggesting effect determining table used when the set value is 3 (FIG. 9-7(C)). )including. In these over-win prize setting suggestive effect determination tables, the effect type of over-win prize setting suggestive effect (type of over-win prize setting suggestive image), the number of over-winning prizes, and the allocation of random numbers for selecting over-win prize setting suggestive effect (displayed in% ) Has been set. The over-prize setting suggestion effect selection random number of the effect is a random number for effect selection updated by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in each table of FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the type of the over-winning setting suggesting image displayed in the over-winning setting suggesting effect is the type of the over-winning setting suggesting image is “display of normal image”. ”, “display of high setting suggestive image”, and “display of high setting confirmed image”.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the rate at which the setting suggestive effect of “displaying a normal image” is selected is set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3, respectively. It is 89% or more, and basically, the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image" is selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) to (C), the ratio of selecting the setting suggestive effect of “displaying a normal image” has a relationship of “setting value 1<setting value 2, setting value 3”. is there. Due to these, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the normal image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest. On the other hand, at least one of a setting suggestive effect of "displaying a high setting suggestive image" and a setting suggesting effect of "displaying a high setting confirmed image" other than the setting suggestive effect of "displaying a normal image". The selection ratio is 1% or less and 11% or less.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7(A) to 9(C), the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a high setting suggestion image” is selected is “setting value 2>setting value 1>setting value 3”. I have a relationship. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is higher than the ratio of the setting value 3. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image” is made in the over-winning setting suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7(A) to 9(C), the ratio at which the setting suggestive effect of “displaying the high setting confirmation image” is selected is “setting value 1>setting value 2>setting value 3”. There is a relation, and in setting 3, the selection ratio is 0%. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting confirmation image” is performed in the over-winning setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the setting value is 1 or the setting value 2. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting confirmation image" is performed in the over-winning setting suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the high setting can be further enhanced. Furthermore, the proportion of the setting suggestive effects that “display the high setting confirmed image” is related to “setting value 1>setting value 2”. When the setting suggestion effect of “” is performed, the player's expectation for the setting value 1 can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7(A) to (C), as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the first over-winning prize setting suggesting effect determination table of (A) used when the setting value 1 is a high setting. And (B) the second over-winning setting suggestion effect production table used when the setting value 2 is the high setting, the (C) third over-winning setting suggestion used when the setting value 2 is the low setting. Compared to the effect determination table, the effect of displaying a high setting suggestion image and the effect of displaying a high setting confirmation suggestion image are set so that the ratio selected as the setting suggestion effect becomes higher as the number of over-winning prizes increases. It is set. As a result, as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the reliability of the suggestion effect of the set value by the over-winning setting suggestion effect increases.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7(A) to (C), as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the proportion of the setting suggestive effects for “displaying the high setting confirmation image” increases and the “high Since the data settings are set so that the ratio of the setting suggestive effects "displaying the setting confirmation image" is increased, the more the number of over-winning prizes increases, the more interesting the effects become, and the player for the high setting. You can increase your expectations.

9-8 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process (S75) of FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a new received command by checking the data in the effect control command reception buffer (231FS001). When there is a new received command (Y in 231FS001), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 231FS002. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process when there is no new received command.

In 231FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a special winning opening winning notification command as a new received command. When there is a special winning opening winning notification (Y in 231FS002), the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the count value of the special winning opening winning number counter (large winning opening winning number count value) (231FS003), and wins the big winning. The mouth prize flag is set (231FS004), and the process proceeds to 231FS005.

The special winning opening winning notification command is an effect control command transmitted from the game controlling microcomputer 100 for each winning detection when it is detected that a game ball has won in the special winning opening. The special winning opening winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening in each round. The special winning opening winning number counter is initialized at the start of each round, so that the number of winnings in the big winning opening for each round can be counted.

On the other hand, if there is no special winning opening winning notification command as a new received command, that is, if another command is newly received (N in 231FS002), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the received command. The settings relating to the effect are made (231FS011), and the process ends.

In 231FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an over-winning has occurred by comparing the special winning opening winning count value updated in 231FS005 with the upper limit of the winning number set for each round. judge. When the over-winning occurs (Y in 231FS005), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 231FS006. On the other hand, when the over-winning is not generated (N in 231FS005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. In 231FS006, the effect control CPU 120 compares the special winning opening winning number count value updated in 231FS005 with the upper limit value of the winning number set for each round, so that the number of over-winning prizes is one. Or not. When the number of over-winning is one (Y in 231FS006), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first over-winning flag and ends the process. When the number of over-winning prizes is not one (N in 231FS006), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 231FS008.

In 231FS008, the effect control CPU 120 compares the special winning opening winning number count value updated in 231FS005 with the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes set for each round to determine whether or not there are two over-winning prizes. Determine whether. When the number of over-winning prizes is two (Y in 231FS008), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second over-winning prize flag (231FS009), and ends the process. When the number of over-winning prizes is not two, that is, when the number of over-winning prizes is three or more (N in 231FS008), the effect control CPU 120 sets the third over-winning prize flag (231FS010), and ends the process. ..

FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart showing the over-winning process. The over-winning process is performed as a part of the process in the big hit medium effect process (S176) of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special winning opening prize flag set in FIG. 9-8 is set (231FS020). When the special winning opening winning flag is set (Y in 231FS020), the effect control CPU 120 resets the special winning opening winning flag (231FS021) and shifts to 231FS022. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process when the special winning opening winning flag is not set (N in 231FS020).

In 231FS022, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any one of the first to third over-winning flags that can be set in the command analysis process of FIG. 9-8 is set. When one of the over-winning flags is set (Y in 231FS022), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 231FS023. On the other hand, when no over-winning flag is set (N in 231FS022), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In 231FS023, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first over-winning flag is set. When the first over-winning flag is set (Y in 231FS023), the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for effect selection of the over-winning setting suggesting effect, and the first over-winning prize of FIG. 9-7(A). Based on the setting suggestion effect determination table, the type of over-winning setting suggestion effect for one over-winning is determined (231FS024), and the process proceeds to 231FS028. On the other hand, if the first over-winning flag is not set (N in 231FS023), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 231FS025.

In 231FS025, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second over-winning flag is set. When the second over-winning flag is set (Y in 231FS025), the effect control CPU 120 extracts an effect selection random number of the over-winning setting suggesting effect, and the second over-winning prize of FIG. 9-7(B). Based on the setting suggestion effect determination table, the type of over-winning setting suggestion effect when two over-winning prizes are set is determined (231FS026), and the process proceeds to 231FS028. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the second over-winning flag is not set, that is, when the third over-winning flag is set (N in 231FS025), the over-winning setting suggesting effect random number for effect selection. 9-7(C), based on the third over-winning setting suggesting effect determination table of FIG. 9-7(C), the types of over-winning setting suggesting effects of three or more over-winning prizes are determined (231FS027) and the process proceeds to 231FS028.

In 231FS028, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set over-winning flag. Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the over-winning setting suggesting image as shown in FIG. 9-6 by executing the over-winning setting suggesting effect of the type determined in 231FS024, 231FS026, or 231FS027 (231FS029). , The process ends.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 9-6 by executing the over-winning process of FIG. 9-9. The over-winning prize setting suggesting effect is executed each time an over-winning prize occurs, at the time of occurrence.

[Example of over-winning setting suggestion effect based on the number of prize balls paid out by over-winning]
The above-described over-winning setting suggesting effect has shown an example in which the selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggesting effects are made different according to the number of game balls that have over-winned (the number of over-winning prizes), as shown in FIG. 9-7. However, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the over-winning setting suggesting effect is that the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the over-winning gaming balls (the total number of prize balls based on the over-winning in each round). Depending on the value), the selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects may be different. For example, in FIG. 9-7, “1 over-winning prize” is replaced with “15 over-winning prize balls” and the like, “2 over-winning prizes” is replaced with “30 over-winning prize balls”, and “Over-winning prize 3” is given. "Pieces" may be replaced with "45 or more over-winning prize balls" or the like. In this example, as the number of payout prize balls due to over-winning increases, the reliability of the over-win prize setting suggesting effect based on the number of payout prize balls due to over-winning increases.

[Execution example of over-winning prize setting suggestion in the interval period between rounds]
The above-mentioned over-win prize setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect (effect by moving accessory, effect by character image) executed in the interval period between the rounds shown in the characteristic part 229F and the characteristic part 230F are in the same big hit game state. May be run on. In that case, the over-winning setting suggesting effect may be executed in an interval period between the rounds after the round in which the over-winning occurs. When performing such an effect, during the interval period between rounds, the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect executed in the interval period between the rounds indicated by the characteristic part 229F and the characteristic part 230F and the execution of the over-winning setting suggestion effect. It is conceivable that the condition may be satisfied in such a manner that the execution timings of the two setting suggestive effects overlap each other during the interval period between rounds. When such an execution period overlaps, both setting suggestion effects may be executed in parallel at overlapping timings. In such an overlap of execution periods, when both setting suggesting effects are executed in parallel at overlapping timings, areas related to the effects such as the display range of images of both setting suggesting effects and the operation range of the movable accessory are They may not overlap or may overlap.

When such execution periods overlap, either one of the setting suggestion effects may be preferentially executed, or one of the setting suggestion effects may be selected and executed by a lottery.

[Execution example of over-winning setting suggestion production in ending production]
In the ending effect process (S177) of FIG. 7, when the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, the over-winning prize setting suggesting effect may be executed. For example, an effect of additionally updating the number of prize balls paid out based on over-winning in all rounds in the jackpot gaming state is performed, and in the ending effect, "120 pieces of over-winning prize payout award balls", all rounds in the jackpot gaming state. It is also possible to display the number of prize balls paid out based on the over-winning through. In this case, a plurality of types of display colors of the number of prize balls paid out based on over-winning may be provided, and the selection ratio of the display colors may be changed depending on the set value (set values 1 to 3). In this way, it is possible to execute the over-winning setting suggesting effect with the display color of the number of prize balls paid out based on the over-winning.

[Indication of over-winning prize setting during the interval period between specific rounds]
The example of setting suggestion effects (effects by the movable accessory, effects by the character image) executed in the interval period between the rounds described above is executed between the rounds (between all rounds). However, the setting suggestive effect executed in the interval period between the rounds is executed only in a part of all the rounds, for example, in the interval period between the rounds of 5R and 6R for the over-winning in 5R. It may be executed only in.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 231F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-6, when an over-winning occurs in each round in the big hit game state, as a setting suggesting effect of setting value which is set value 1 to setting value 3 Since the over-prize setting suggestion effect can be executed, the interest of the over-win prize setting suggestion effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the set value can be improved.

[2] Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are different depending on the number of over-winning prizes and the number of over-winning prizes, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of setting suggestive effects.

[3] As described in [Example of over-winning prize setting suggestion based on the number of prize-balls paid out due to over-winning], over-win prize setting suggestion based on the number of prize-balls paid out due to over-winning according to the number of prize-ball payouts due to over-winning Since the reliability of the effect is different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of prize balls to be paid out due to over-winning.

[4] As shown in 231FS023 to 231FS029 in FIG. 9-9, the over-winning setting suggesting effect is executed each time an over-winning occurs, so the player pays attention to the over-winning setting suggesting effect each time an over-winning occurs. Can be made.

[5] As shown in FIG. 9-7, depending on the number of over-winning prizes at the end of the big-hit game state, the reliability of the over-winning setting suggesting effect based on the over-winning number is different, so the player is a big hit. It is possible to draw attention to the effect at the end of the game state.

[6] As shown in the example of the over-winning setting suggesting effect in the inter-round interval period of FIG. 9-6, the over-winning setting suggesting effect can be executed in the interval period between the rounds. The player can be focused on the production.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-9 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control regarding the setting of the characteristic portion 71AK to the characteristic portion 75AK and the control regarding the effect of the characteristic portion 231F may be combined.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 231F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 231F, conventionally, as a game machine whose setting value can be changed, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In addition, as a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect when a maximum number of winnings occurs in a big winning opening (so-called over-winning) during a jackpot game as an advantageous state, JP-A-2014-193271 Some are described in the official gazette. However, in the technologies described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-193271, there is room for improvement in the specific effect due to over-winning of the gaming machine having the set value. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 231F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the specific effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of advancing the game so that the degree of advantage (big hit probability, etc.) for the player is different based on the set value (set value 1-set value 3, etc.). With and
Variable winning means (special variable winning) capable of changing between a first state (open state) in which a game medium (game ball etc.) can win and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot win or cannot win a prize Ball device 7 etc.),
When a predetermined number (upper limit value of the number of winnings) of game media is won to the variable winning means, the variable winning means is controlled from the first state to the second state. 100 etc.),
It is possible to execute a specific effect (over-winning setting suggestion effect of FIG. 9-6) in association with that more than a predetermined number of game media have won the variable winning means (over-winning).
Execution ratios of a plurality of types of specific effects are different according to set values (selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects are different according to setting values 1 to 3 in FIG. 9-7),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The specific effect has a different execution rate according to the number of times the game medium has won more than the predetermined number (the number of over-winnings, the number of over-winnings) (in FIG. 9-7, a plurality of types of setting suggestions are suggested depending on the number of over-winnings). The selection ratio of the production is different, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 231F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the number of times the specific effect is executed.

As a game machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 231F,
The specific effect is executed in accordance with the number of game media obtained based on the winning of more than the predetermined number of game media (the number of prize balls paid out due to over-winning, etc.) (over based on the number of prize balls paid out due to over-winning) The degree of reliability of the prize setting suggesting effect, etc.) is different ([Example of over prize setting suggesting effect based on the number of prize balls paid out due to over winning] etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 231F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the number of game media acquired.

As a game machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 231F,
The specific effect is executed each time more than the predetermined number of game media are won (FIG. 9-6, 231FS023 to 231FS029 in FIG. 9-9, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 231F.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid each time more than a predetermined number of game media are won.

As a game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 231F,
At the end of the advantageous state, the specific effect is executed according to the number of times more than the predetermined number of game media are won (over-winning number etc.) (reliability of over-winning setting suggesting effect by over-winning number etc.) Are different ([Execution example of over-winning prize setting suggestion effect in ending effect]),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 231F.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid when the advantageous state ends.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) a plurality of times,
The specific effect can be executed during the period (interval period between rounds) from the end of the particular predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (over in the inter-round interval period of FIG. 9-6). Example of suggesting winning settings),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic part 231F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

[Explanation on Characteristic Section 232F]
Next, the characteristic part 232F of the present embodiment will be described. During the big hit game state, the game balls can be won in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each winning. The number of payouts of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit game state is the number of game balls that the player has acquired in the big hit game state, and is called an acquired number.

In the big hit game state, every time a game ball winning in the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected, a main winning prize winning notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command. Sent. In the production control CPU 120, each time the special winning opening winning notification command is received, the jackpot is calculated by adding and updating the predetermined number of payout balls per winning ball to the special winning opening. A calculation for adding and updating the number of game balls acquired by the player in the game state is performed. The number of game balls to be acquired in the gaming state is performed once per jackpot gaming state. When the number of game balls acquired during the big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, every 1000 balls), an acquired number notification effect indicating the acquired number is executed.

In the feature portion 232F, in the big hit game state, as the number-of-wins notification effect, in addition to showing the number of wins exceeded when the number of game balls obtained in the big hit game state exceeds a specific number, the above-mentioned big hit is won. A setting value such as a winning probability of a big hit is executed for the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, which is capable of suggesting which of the setting values 1 to 3 the setting value such as the probability is set to. An example will be described in which the execution ratios (selection ratios) of the effects provided for the effect types differ depending on 1-3.

FIG. 9-10 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing a production example of the acquisition number setting suggesting production relating to the characteristic portion 232F.

9-10, the production mode of the acquisition number setting suggestive production on the image display device 5 when the low setting value 3 is set in (A) to (C), and (D) to In (F), the production mode of the acquisition number setting suggesting production when the setting value 1 which is the high setting is set is shown. The specific number at which the acquisition number setting suggesting effect is executed is set for every 1000 pieces, for example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces,. Therefore, for every 1000 pieces, an effect image of the acquired number setting suggesting effect is displayed when the specific number is exceeded.

As shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, for example, “2000 shots OVER” as shown in (A) and (D), (B), The number-of-games image 232F001 showing the number of game balls acquired, such as "5000 shots OVER" as shown in (E) and "10000 shots OVER" as shown in (C) and (F), and the first character image. ~ A character image 232F002, 232F003, 232F004, 232F005... Selected from a plurality of types of character images called the fifth character image is displayed together.

Regarding the character images displayed in the acquisition setting suggestion effect, the high setting of the first character image to the fifth character image (setting values such as setting value 1 to setting value 3) as shown in FIG. The selection ratio is set such that the degree of expectation, which is the set value 1 and the set value 2), has a relationship of “first character image<second character image<third character image<fourth character image<fifth character image”. Has been done. In particular, the fifth character image is a character image of the acquisition number setting suggesting effect that is determined to be the first setting value which is the high setting.

In the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, the increase in the number of acquisitions is executed every time the number of acquisitions exceeds 1000, and at the time of execution, the character image to be displayed is selected. Thereby, as shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), the character image displayed as the acquired number setting suggestive effect may be different each time the acquired number setting suggestive effect is executed.

FIG. 9-11 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination table used for selecting an effect type (type of character image) of setting suggestive effect executed as the acquisition number setting suggestive effect. The acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

9-11, the acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination table is the first acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination table (FIG. 9-11(A)) used when the setting value is 1, and the setting value is 2. Second acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination table used (FIG. 9-11(B)), and third acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination table used when setting value is 3 (FIG. 9-11(C)). including. In these acquisition number setting suggestive effect determination tables, the correspondence relationship between the type of character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestive effect, the acquired number range, and the allocation of random numbers for character image selection of the effect (displayed in%) Is set. The character image selection random number is a production selection random number updated by the production control CPU 120.

As shown in each of the tables in FIGS. 9-11A to 9C, the types of character images displayed in the setting suggestion effect for the acquisition number setting suggestion effect are “display of first character image” and “second character image”. "Display of character image", "display of third character image", "display of fourth character image", and "display of fifth character image".

As shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) to (C), the setting suggestive effect of “displaying the fifth character image” can be selected at the setting value 1, but is selected at the setting value 2 and the setting value 3. It is impossible. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect for displaying the fifth character image is made, it is confirmed that the setting value is 1, so that the player's expectation for the setting value 1 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(C), in a low setting such as the setting value 3, the selection ratios of the setting suggestive effects for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image are the same. As shown in 9-11 (A) and (B), the setting suggestion production selection ratio for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image in the high setting such as the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 is " There is a relation of setting suggestion effect of displaying 1 character image <setting suggestion effect of displaying second character image <setting suggestion effect of displaying third character image <setting suggestion effect of displaying fourth character image> It is set.

Therefore, in the setting suggestive effects for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image, the proportions selected in the high setting are different due to the relation of such proportions. As a result, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased according to the type of the character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect. For example, when the fourth character image is displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased more than when the first character image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(C), at a low setting such as the setting value 3, regardless of the number of acquisitions, each of the setting suggestive effects of displaying the first character image to the fourth character image is displayed. Although the selection ratios are the same, as shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) and 9(B), the setting suggesting effect of displaying the third character image at a high setting such as the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 and The relationship of "1000 to 3000 shots <4000 to 9000 shots <10000 shots or more" is set for the selection ratio of the setting suggestive effect for displaying the fourth character image.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) to (C), as the number of acquisitions increases, the first acquisition number setting suggesting effect determination table of (A) used when the setting value 1 is a high setting, and The (B) second acquisition number setting suggestive production determination table of (B) used when the setting value 2 is high setting, the (C) third acquisition number setting suggesting production used when the setting value 2 is low setting. Data is set such that the ratio of the effects that display the high setting suggestion image and the high setting confirmation suggestion image such as the fourth character image and the fifth character image to be selected as the setting suggestion effect is higher than that in the determination table. Has been done. As a result, as the number of acquisitions increases, the reliability of the suggestion effect of the setting value by the acquisition number suggestion effect increases.

Therefore, the setting suggestion effect display for displaying a specific character image such as the third character image and the fourth character image among the first character image to the fourth character image is set to a high setting in the relationship of such a ratio. In, the selection ratio differs depending on the number of acquisitions. As a result, as the number of acquisitions increases, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a high setting depending on the type of the character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect. For example, as the acquired number increases, when the third character image or the fourth character image is displayed in the acquired number setting suggesting effect, the player's expectation for the high setting is higher than that when the first character image is displayed. Can be increased.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the acquisition number notification process. The acquisition number notification process is performed as a part of the process in the big hit medium effect process (S176) of FIG. 7. The calculation for adding and updating the number of acquired game balls in the game state each time the special winning opening winning notification command is received is performed in a process different from the acquired number notification process.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the number of game balls to be acquired is 1000×n (n=1 to 3), which is a specific number, based on confirmation of the above-described calculation result, which is an excess time. It is determined whether or not (232FS001). Specifically, in 232FS001, first it is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 1000 rounds, then it is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 2000 rounds, and then when it exceeds 3000 rounds. Check whether or not In this way, with respect to the acquired number of 1000 to 3000 shots, it is confirmed for every 1000 shots whether or not the acquired number exceeds a specific number.

When the number of game balls to be acquired is 1000×n (n=1 to 3), which is one of the excess times (Y in 232FS001), the effect control CPU 120 is for selecting a character image for the acquisition number setting suggesting effect. A random number is extracted, and 1000 to 3000 shots are generated by one of the first to third acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C) corresponding to the set value (set values 1 to 3). The effect type including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding number of acquisitions is exceeded is determined (232FS002), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, when the number of game balls acquired is not 1000xn (n=1 to 3) at any time (N in 232FS001), the effect control CPU 120 shifts the processing to 232FS003.

In 232FS003, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on checking the above-mentioned calculation result, and the number of game balls to be acquired is a specific number of 1000×m (m=4 to 9) at any one of the exceeding points. Or not. Specifically, in 232FS003, first it is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 4000, then it is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 5000, and then when it exceeds 6000. It is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 7,000 rounds, and then whether it is the time when it exceeds 8,000 rounds Check whether it is the time when it exceeds. In this way, with respect to the acquired number of 4000 to 9000, whether or not the acquired number exceeds a specific number is confirmed every 1000.

When the number of game balls acquired is one of the excess times of 1000×m (m=4 to 9) (Y in 232FS003), the effect control CPU 120 generates a random number for effect selection of the acquired number setting suggesting effect. When 4000 to 9000 shots are exceeded by any of the first to third acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIG. 9-11(A) to (C) which are extracted and set values (setting values 1 to 3) Of these, the effect type including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding acquisition number is exceeded is determined (232FS004), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, when the number of game balls acquired is not 1000xm (m=4 to 9) at any time (N in 232FS003), the effect control CPU 120 shifts the number of game balls acquired to 232FS005. To do.

In 232FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of game balls acquired exceeds one of a specific number (every 1000) of 1000×p (≧10) or more. Specifically, in 232FS005, first, it is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 10000 rounds, and then it is confirmed whether it is the time when it exceeds 11000 rounds. Check whether it is the time when the number of acquisitions has been exceeded.

When the number of game balls acquired exceeds one of the specific numbers of 1000×p (≧10) or more (Y in 232FS005), the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect of the number-of-games setting suggesting effects. Random numbers are extracted, and 10,000 or more shots are made by any one of the first to third acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C) corresponding to the setting values (setting values 1 to 3). When the specific number is exceeded, the effect type including the character image displayed when the corresponding acquired number is exceeded is determined (232FS006), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 232FS007 when the number of game balls acquired is not at any one of the specific times of 1000×p (≧10) or more (N in 232FS005).

In 232FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether any one of the specific numbers (timing 11111, 2222,...) Of the doublet eyes of which the acquired number is 1111×r (≧1) or more is exceeded. .. Specifically, in 232FS007, first, it is confirmed whether it is the time when 1111 rounds are exceeded, and then whether it is the time when 22222 rounds are exceeded. Check whether it is the time when any of the numbers is exceeded.

The production control CPU 120, when the acquisition number is any one of the specific numbers of the doublet eyes of 1111×r (≧1) or more (Y in 232FS007), high setting (setting value 1, setting value). If 2), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to display the special acquisition number image including the special character images other than the first to fifth character images shown in FIG. 9-11, and the lottery is won. If so, it is decided to display the special acquisition number image (232FS008), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. If you do not win the lottery, the special acquisition number image is not displayed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process when the acquired number is not the time point at which the doublet of 1111×r (≧1) or more is exceeded (N in 232FS007). In this way, the special acquisition number image that can be displayed only when the set value is high is provided. Thereby, when the special acquisition number image is displayed, it is determined that the set value is the high setting.

In 232FS009, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character image determined in 232FS002, 232FS004, 232FS006, or 232FS008 and the acquired number image corresponding to the acquired number, and ends the process.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the acquired number setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 9-10 by executing the acquired number notification process of FIG. 9-12.

[Demonstration example when execution period overlaps with suggested production setting and other productions]
The above-mentioned winning number setting suggesting effect is executed at a time when the number of winning game balls reaches a specific number during the big hit game state, so that it is executed during a predetermined period after the start of the game state, for example, an interval between rounds. In the period, the fanfare production period at the start of the big hit game state, and the ending production period at the end of the big hit game state, setting suggestive effects (for example, setting suggestive effects in the interval period between rounds) and other The production and the execution period may partially or completely overlap. In such a case, the acquisition number setting suggestive effect may be preferentially executed.

In addition, when the execution period of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the other effects partially or entirely overlap, both the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the other effects may be executed in parallel. .. In addition, the execution timing of either one of the overlapping effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so that the overlapping effects are not executed. Further, either one of the effects may be preferentially executed, and both effects are executed, but either one of the effects is limited (for example, one effect image is reduced and displayed, one audio output is performed. Alternatively, the execution of a part of the effects such as the light emission effect may be stopped).

[Execution example when execution period overlaps between suggestion setting suggestion production and production suggestion over-winning setting]
The above-mentioned winning number setting suggesting effect is executed when the number of winning game balls reaches a specific number during the big hit game state, so that it is executed in an interval period between rounds, for example, over-winning setting of the characteristic part 231F. The suggested production and the execution period may partially or completely overlap. In such a case, both the acquisition number suggesting effect and the acquisition number suggesting effect may be executed in parallel.

When the execution periods of the score setting suggesting effect and the over-winning setting suggesting effect overlap, either one of the effects may be preferentially executed. In addition, the execution timing of one of the effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so that the effects are not executed in duplicate. Further, either one of the effects may be preferentially executed, and both effects are executed, but either one of the effects is limited (for example, one effect image is reduced and displayed, one audio output is performed. Alternatively, the execution of a part of the effects such as the light emission effect may be stopped).

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 232F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-11, setting suggestion of which set value among set value 1 to set value 3 is set each time the number of game balls acquired during the big hit game state reaches a specific number As the effect, the acquisition number setting suggesting effect can be executed, so that the interest of the acquisition number setting suggesting effect e of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the set value can be improved.

[2] As shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the acquired number image 232F001 and the character images such as the first character image to the fifth character image 232F002 to 232F005... 9-11 (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 9-11, since the selection ratio of the display of the character image of the plurality of types of setting suggestive effect differs depending on the setting value 1 to the setting value 3, The type of the specific image displayed in the setting suggestion effect can be paid attention to.

[3] As shown by 232FS007 and 232FS008 in FIG. 9-12, the image displayed in the setting suggestion effect includes the number of doublet wins image and the special character image. It is possible to focus on whether or not the several images and the special character image are displayed, and the interest in the game is improved.

[4] As shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) to (C), a confidence indicating which set value is suggested by the character image when the number of game balls acquired is larger than when the number of game balls acquired is smaller. Since the degree is high, the enjoyment of the game ball can be enjoyed, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the image displayed in the setting suggesting effect is improved, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[5] As shown in [Example of production when acquisition period setting suggesting effect and execution period overlap with other effects], both acquisition number setting suggesting effect and setting suggesting effect of interval period between rounds can be executed In such a case, when the execution timings of these effects overlap, the acquisition number setting suggestion effect is executed, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in acquiring the game ball.

[6] In the case where both the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the over winning prize setting suggestion effect can be executed, as shown in [Example of production when overlapping execution periods of the acquisition number suggestion effect and the over-winning setting suggestion effect] When the execution timings of these effects are overlapped with each other, both effects are executed, so that both effects are surely executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-10 to 9-12 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control relating to the setting of the characteristic portion 71AK to the characteristic portion 75AK and the control relating to the effect of the characteristic portion 232F may be combined.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 232F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic portion 232F, there is a gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, which can change the setting value. Further, in a jackpot game as an advantageous state, as a game machine capable of executing a notification effect when the number of game balls that are game media reaches a specific number, it is described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075436. There is something. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075436, there is room for improvement in the notification effect of the gaming machine provided with the set value. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 232F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 3, etc.),
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of advancing the game so that the degree of advantage (big hit probability, etc.) for the player is different based on the set value (set value 1-set value 3, etc.). With and
When the number of payouts (the number of payouts) of the game medium (gaming ball) in the advantageous state reaches a specific number (excess number for each 1000 shots), a notification effect (an acquisition number setting suggesting effect) can be executed.
Execution ratios of a plurality of types of notification effects are different according to the set values (the selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are different according to the setting values 1 to 3 in FIG. 9-11),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 232F,
The notification effect is composed of an acquired number image (acquired number image 232F001 etc.) showing the number of game media acquired and a specific image (first character image to fifth character image etc. of FIG. 9-10),
Different selection ratios of the specific images provided in plural types according to set values (set value 1 to set value 3) (set values 1 to 3 in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C)) The selection ratio of the character image display of multiple types of setting suggestive effects is different),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 232F.
With such a configuration, the type of the specific image can be paid attention to.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 232F,
The notification effect includes a special acquisition number image (a doublet acquisition number image and a special character image) that is executed only at a high set value that is highly advantageous to the player (232FS007 of FIG. 9-12, 232FS008),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 232F.
According to such a configuration, whether or not the specially acquired number image is displayed can be paid attention to, and the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 232F,
When the number of acquired game media is large, the setting suggestion reliability indicating which set value is suggested by the specific image is higher than when the number is small (FIGS. 9-11(A) to (C)),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 or the means 3 related to the characteristic part 232F.
According to such a configuration, the enjoyment of the game medium is gained and the setting suggestion reliability of the specific image is improved, so that the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 232F,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (such as setting suggestion effect of an interval period between rounds) for setting suggestion different from the notification effect during a predetermined period in the advantageous state,
When the execution timings of the notification effect and the setting suggestion effect overlap, the notification effect is preferentially executed ([Example of effect when execution period overlaps between acquisition number setting suggestion effect and other effects], etc.) ),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 232F.
According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is prioritized over the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in acquiring the game medium.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 232F,
Variable winning means (special variable winning) capable of changing between a first state (open state) in which a game medium (game ball etc.) can win and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot win or cannot win a prize Ball device 7 etc.),
When a predetermined number (upper limit value of the number of prizes) of game media is won to the variable winning means, the variable winning means is controlled from the first state to the second state (variable winning control CPU 120). And further,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (over-winning setting suggestion effect of FIG. 9-6) in association with that more than a predetermined number of game media have won the variable winning means (over-winning).
Execution ratios of a plurality of types of specific effects are different according to set values (eg, selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are different according to setting values 1 to 3 in FIG. 9-11),
When the execution timing of the notification effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap, any effect is executed ([execution example at the time of overlapping execution periods of the acquisition number suggesting effect and the over-winning setting suggesting effect], etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 232F.
According to such a configuration, even if the execution timings of the notification effect and the specific effect are overlapped, both effects are surely executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 233F]
Next, the characteristic part 232F of the present embodiment will be described. Regarding a pachinko gaming machine, a V winning is generated when a V winning occurs due to the detection means detecting that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (V area) provided in the variable winning ball device. There is one in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a V-winning notification effect, which is an effect for notifying that.

An example of a pachinko gaming machine in which various game controls are executed when a V winning occurs is the following one-and-two-kind mixing machine and V certainty variation machine.

[Type 1 type 2 mixer]
First, the outline of the configuration of the one-two-mixer will be described. A first-class gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of a lottery judgment using a random number for big hit judgment (hereinafter referred to as a big hit judgment), and a lottery judgment using a random number for a small hit judgment ( Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine that is controlled in the small hitting game state based on the determination result of (small hitting determination), and is combined with the second type gaming machine that can be controlled in the big hitting game state when a V winning occurs, It is called a so-called one-two-mixer.

Specifically, in the one-and-two type mixing machine, like the special variable winning ball device 7, in addition to the variable winning ball device for the big hit provided with the big winning opening that is opened in the big hit advantageous state, the small hit game state There is provided a variable winning ball device which is opened at. A variable winning ball device for small hits is provided in the game area. The variable winning ball device for small hits is provided with a V area into which a game ball can enter.

When the start winning at the first start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed. When the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the first special figure is executed and the big hit display result (specific display result ), the first-class big hit game control is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in which the big winning variable winning ball device is in a big hit game state in which it is opened for a predetermined number of rounds.

When a winning start to the second starting winning opening is detected, a jackpot determination is executed, and when a determination result (specific display result) is determined to be a jackpot, the variable display of the second special map is executed and a jackpot display result. Then, the big hit game state is controlled, and the same game control as the big hit based on the start winning a prize to the first start winning hole is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the small hit determination is not the big hit, the small hit determination is executed, and when the result of the small hit is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. Is controlled to the small hitting game state, and the variable winning ball device for the small hitting is controlled to the open state for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the V area and is detected, the variable prize ball device for the big hit is played over a predetermined number of rounds. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class jackpot game control, which is a jackpot game state that is released.

[V confirmation machine]
Next, the outline of the configuration of the V certainty variation machine will be described. In the V probability variation machine, a V area in which a game ball can enter is provided in the variable winning ball device which is opened in the big hit game state like the special variable winning ball device 7. The probability variation winning device in which the V region is provided may be configured by the special variable winning ball device 7 itself or may be configured by a big winning variable winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7.

In the V-probability variation machine, it is determined to be a big hit based on the determination result of the determination for the big hit determination, and when it is determined to be the type of the probability variation big hit based on the determination result of the big hit type determination, the big hit game state is entered. In a predetermined round, the variable winning ball device for big hits is controlled to be in an open state in such a manner that the game balls can enter the V area. When it is determined not to make the probability variation big hit type based on the determination result of the big hit type determination, the variable winning ball device for big hits is controlled to an open state in a manner that the game ball cannot enter the V area.

In the V probability variation machine, when the game ball enters the V area and is detected in a predetermined round, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 controls the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends.
[V prize setting suggestion example]
The characteristic part 233F is an effect of notifying that the V winning has occurred when the V winning has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine capable of generating the V winning such as the above-described one-and-two type mixing machine and the V certainty variation machine. As a V winning notification effect, in addition to notifying that a V winning has occurred, it is possible to suggest which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value such as the above-mentioned jackpot winning probability is set. An example will be described in which a prize setting suggestion effect is executed, and for the V prize setting suggestion effect, the execution rate (selection rate) of the effect provided for the effect type is different according to the set values 1 to 3 such as the winning probability of the big hit. ..

FIG. 9-13 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the V winning setting suggesting effect related to the characteristic part 233F. In a pachinko gaming machine that can generate a V prize, such as a one-and-two type mixing machine and a V confirmation machine, when a V prize is generated, a V prize occurrence designation command is used as a production control command that specifies that the V prize is generated. When the production control board 12 receives the V winning generation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning setting suggesting effect.

In FIG. 9-13, an effect mode of the V winning setting suggesting effect when a normal image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the low setting value 3 is set in (A) is shown. A high-setting suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the high setting value 1 is set in (B), and an effect mode of the V winning setting suggestive effect is shown in (D). The production mode of the V winning setting suggestive production when the high setting confirmation image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 1 which is the setting is set is shown.

In the V-winning setting suggesting effect, for example, in the image display device 5, as in (A) to (C), a V-winning image 233F001 indicating a “V-win” called “V” and a predetermined color around the V-winning image 233F001 are displayed. In addition to basically displaying a V image consisting of an aura image (a jagged image), it is possible to suggest which of the setting values 1 to 3 the setting value such as the winning probability of the big hit is set. As such an image, a character image selected from a plurality of types of character images such as a first character image 233F002, a second character image 233F003, and a third character image 233F004 is displayed.

The first character image 233F002 shown in (A) is not limited to the low setting or the high setting and is a character image used when displaying the normal image selected and displayed at the highest ratio. is there. The second character image 233F003 shown in (B) is a character image used when displaying a high setting suggestion image having a higher selection rate when the high setting is set than when the low setting is set. The third character image 233F004 shown in (C) is a character image used when displaying a high setting confirmation image that is not selected in the low setting but is selected only in the high setting.

FIG. 9-14 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, a V winning setting suggesting effect determination table used for selecting an effect type (an effect image including a character image) of a setting suggesting effect executed as a V winning setting suggesting effect. .. The V winning setting suggesting effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

FIG. 9-14(A) shows the number of consecutive big hits (the number of consecutive big hits, for example, the probability change state, and the big hit during the special game state after the big hit game state such as the time saving state has ended. Is a first V winning setting suggesting effect determination table used when the number of consecutive occurrences of) occurs 9 times or less. FIG. 9-11(B) is a second V winning setting suggesting effect determination table used when the number of consecutive holidays in the big hit is 10 or more. The first and second V prize setting suggestive effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first and second V prize setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. 9-14(A) and (B), character images such as the first character image to the third character image displayed in the V prize setting suggestion effect determination table. When the corresponding relationship between the type of effect image including the type and the allocation (displayed in %) of the V winning setting suggestion effect selection random number is set to the set value 1 or the set value 2 , And the set value 3 are shown. The V winning setting suggesting effect selection random number is an effect selecting random number updated by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in each table of FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the type of the effect image including the type of the character image displayed in the V winning setting suggestion effect is “a normal image including the display of the first character image”. Display suggestion, "displaying high setting suggestion image including display of second character image", and "displaying high setting confirmation image including display of third character image". Including setting suggestion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), in the V winning setting suggesting effect, the rate at which the setting suggesting effect “displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image” is selected is a set value. 88% or more for each of the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3, and basically the setting suggesting effect of "displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image" is selected at an extremely high rate. .. Then, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image" is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

As shown in FIGS. 9-14(A) and (B), the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect for "displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image" is "set value 3<set value 2". There is a relationship of “setting value 1”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image" is performed, the ratio of the set value 1 is the highest.

As shown in FIGS. 9-14(A) and 9(B), the selection ratio of the setting suggestive effect for “displaying the high setting confirmation image including the display of the third character image” is “setting value 2, 3<setting There is a relationship of "value 1", and the set values 2 and 3 are 0%. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting confirmation image including the display of the third character image” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is 1.

And according to FIGS. 9-14(A) and (B), the setting suggestion effect which "displays the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image" and the "high setting including the display of the third character image" are performed. In the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the suggestion image”, the ratio of the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 which is the high setting is higher than the setting value 3 which is the low setting. As a result, when the setting suggesting effect of "displaying the high setting suggestive image including the display of the second character image" and the setting suggesting effect of "displaying the high setting suggestive image including the display of the third character image" are performed Is more likely to be high than low.

Further, the (B) second V prize setting suggesting effect determination table used when the number of consecutive vacations is 10 times or more is the (1) first V winning setting suggesting effect used when the number of consecutive vacations is 9 times or less. Compared to the determination table, when the high value such as the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 is set, the setting suggestion effect “displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image” and the “display of the third character image” are performed. When the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting suggestive image including display" is high and the setting value is low such as setting value 3, "displaying a normal image including the display of the first character image" is performed. The ratio of setting suggestive effects to be selected is low. As a result, the reliability of the set value suggestion effect by the V winning setting suggestion effect increases as the number of consecutive holidays increases.

9-14 (A) and (B), when the image to be displayed in the V prize setting suggestion effect is selected using the first and second V prize setting suggestion effect determination tables, basically, "the first character image The setting suggestion effect "displaying the normal image including the display" is executed at a high frequency, and the setting suggestion effect "displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image" is performed at a lower frequency than the setting suggestion effect of the second character image. Either the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display" or the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the third character image" is executed. And, the expectation of whether the setting is high or not depends on the type of the character image displayed in the V winning setting suggesting effect, and the expectation of which one of the setting values 1 to 3 corresponds is different. With such a V winning setting suggesting effect determination table setting suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation of the player for a set value such as a big hit. Further, depending on the type of the character image, it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous for the player, so by the V winning setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process. The V winning notification process is a process that is performed as a part of the big hit medium effect process (S176) of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to receive a V prize generation designation command which is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a V prize has been generated. It is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred (233FS001). When it is time to receive the V winning generation designation command (Y in 233FS001), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 233FS002. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process when it is not time to receive the V winning occurrence designation command (N in 233FS001).

In 233FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the number-of-games counter, which is a counter that counts the number of games, is 10 or more. The number of consecutive holidays counter is a counting unit that counts the number of consecutive holidays by adding and updating the count value each time a big hit that satisfies the conditions of the consecutive holidays described above occurs in a process different from the V winning notification process. is there.

When the count value of the number of consecutive games counter is not 10 or more (N in 233FS002), the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for effect image selection of the V winning setting suggesting effect, and the result is shown in FIG. 9-14(A). Based on the first V winning setting suggesting effect determination table, an effect image including the display of the character image at the time of V winning according to the current setting value (setting values 1 to 3) is determined (233FS003), and the process proceeds to 233FS004. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive games counter is 10 times or more (Y in 233FS002), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the effect image selection random number of the V prize setting suggesting effect, and the result is shown in FIG. Based on the second V winning setting suggesting effect determination table, an effect image including the display of the character image at the time of V winning according to the setting is determined (233FS005), and the process proceeds to 233FS004.

In 233FS004, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character image and the V winning image corresponding to the effect image determined in 233FS003 or 233FS004, and ends the process.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning setting informing effect as shown in FIG. 9-13 by executing the V winning notification process of FIG. 9-15.

[Example of performance when overlapping execution periods of V prize setting suggestion effect and acquisition number setting suggestion effect]
When the execution periods of the V winning setting suggesting effect and the acquisition number setting suggesting effect of the characteristic portion 233F partially or entirely overlap, the V winning setting suggesting effect may be preferentially executed.

In addition, when the execution period of the V winning setting suggesting effect and the execution number setting suggesting effect overlap, both effects may be executed in parallel. Further, either one of the effects may be preferentially executed. In addition, the execution timing of one of the effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so that the effects are not executed in duplicate. Further, either one of the effects may be preferentially executed, and both effects are executed, but either one of the effects is limited (for example, one effect image is reduced and displayed, one audio output is performed. Alternatively, the execution of a part of the effects such as the light emission effect may be stopped).

As an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect using the character image, the effect using a plurality of different types of character images is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one character image is used, and a plurality of character images are used. It may be possible to perform an effect that suggests a set value by operating in one of the various types of motion modes and changing the selection ratio of a plurality of types of motion modes in accordance with the set value for one character image.

In addition, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the V winning image 33F001 is displayed in a plurality of types of operation patterns (a plurality of types of rotation directions (up and down, left and right), a plurality of swinging movements (up and down, left and right), etc.). It may be possible to perform an effect of operating the V winning image 33F001 with an operation pattern selected from a plurality of types. In that case, an effect that suggests the set value may be provided by changing the selection ratios of the plurality of types of V winning images according to the set value.

Further, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, an effect using one type of V winning image 33F001 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of different display modes (a plurality of types of colors and a plurality of shapes are used. , A plurality of sizes, etc.) may be used. In that case, an effect that suggests the set value may be provided by changing the selection ratio of the V winning image of a plurality of types of display modes according to the set value. The effect of suggesting the setting value by changing the selection ratio of the V winning image of the plurality of types of display modes according to the setting value, and the selection of the plurality of types of V winning images according to the setting value as described above. You may make it perform the V winning setting suggestion production which combined the production which makes the ratio different.

Further, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the V winning setting suggesting effect using the V winning image 33F001 as described above is executed without executing the V winning setting suggesting effect by the character image. Good.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 233F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-13, according to the set value 1 to the set value 3, for the pachinko game machine of the one-two mix machine that can be controlled to the big hit game state based on the detection of the V winning. Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V winning setting suggesting effects using character images or the like are different, it is possible to improve the interest of the V winning setting suggesting effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having set values.

[2] As shown in FIG. 9-13, regarding the pachinko gaming machine of the V probability variation machine that can be controlled to the probability variation state based on the detection of the V winning, the character image is displayed according to the setting values 1 to 3. Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V prize setting suggesting effects using the above, etc. are different, it is possible to improve the interest of the V prize setting suggesting effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having set values.

[3] As shown in FIG. 9-14, since the selection ratios of the character images of the plurality of types of V winning setting suggestive effects are different depending on the setting values 1 to 3, the player is focused on the type of the character image. The enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[4] As shown in FIGS. 9-14(A) and (B), since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V winning setting suggestive effects are different depending on the number of consecutive holidays, they are continuously controlled in the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to draw attention to the pattern of the V winning setting suggesting effect when the player is in the game, and the interest in the game is improved.

[5] As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the higher the number of games, the higher the setting suggestion reliability indicating which setting value is suggested by the character image of the winning setting suggestion effect. high. As a result, the fun of the game is improved by associating the number of consecutive big hits with the character image of the prize setting suggesting effect.

[6] As shown in [Example of production when overlapping execution periods of V prize setting suggesting effect and acquisition number setting suggesting effect], the execution period of the V winning setting suggesting effect and the acquisition number setting suggesting effect of the characteristic part 233F is In the case where some or all of them overlap, by preferentially executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of security when passing through the V region.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-13 to 9-15 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control relating to the setting of the characteristic portion 71AK to the characteristic portion 75AK and the control relating to the effect of the characteristic portion 233F may be combined.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Section 233F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic portion 232F, there is a gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, which can change the setting value. Further, as a game machine capable of executing a passage notification effect when a game ball, which is a game medium, passes through a specific area, there is one described in JP-A-2016-202605. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-202605, there is room for improvement in the passage notification effect of the gaming machine in which the set value is set. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 233F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the passage notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 3, etc.),
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of advancing the game so that the degree of advantage (big hit probability, etc.) for the player is different based on the set value (set value 1-set value 3, etc.). With and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (V area), it is possible to control to the advantageous state (big hit game state etc.),
When the game medium passes through the specific area, a passage notification effect (V prize setting suggestion effect) is executed, and the execution ratio of the plurality of kinds of passage notification effects provided according to the set value is different (in FIG. 9-14). The selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects differ depending on the setting values 1 to 3),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the passage notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 233F,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 3, etc.),
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of advancing the game so that the degree of advantage (big hit probability, etc.) for the player is different based on the set value (set value 1-set value 3, etc.). With and
It is possible to control to a special state (probably changed state, etc.) different from the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific region (V region),
When the game medium passes through the specific area, a passage notification effect (V prize setting suggestion effect) is executed, and the execution ratio of the plurality of kinds of passage notification effects provided according to the set value is different (in FIG. 9-14). The selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects differ depending on the setting values 1 to 3),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the passage notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 233F,
In the passage notification effect, predetermined images (V winning image 33F001 and the first character image 233F002 to the third character image 233F003) are displayed, and the selection ratios of the plurality of predetermined images provided according to the set value are different (Fig. 9-14, the selection ratios of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects differ depending on the setting values 1 to 3),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 233F.
With such a configuration, the type of the predetermined image can be paid attention to, and the interest in the game is improved.

As a game machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 233F,
The execution ratio of the passage notification effect is different according to the number of times of continuous control in the advantageous state (number of consecutive holidays) (a plurality of types depending on the number of consecutive holidays in FIGS. (The selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different)
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 233F.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the passage notification effect when the state is continuously controlled in the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 233F,
The larger the number of times of continuous control in the advantageous state (the number of consecutive holidays), the higher the setting suggestion reliability indicating which set value is suggested by the predetermined image (FIG. 9-14(A), (B)),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 233F.
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved by associating the number of consecutive advantageous states with the predetermined image.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic portion 233F,
When the number of payouts (the number of payouts) of the game medium (gaming ball) in the advantageous state reaches a specific number (excess number for each 1000 shots), a notification effect (an acquisition number setting suggesting effect) can be executed.
When the passage notification effect and the notification effect are executed at the same timing, the passage notification effect is preferentially executed (([V prize setting suggesting effect and acquisition number setting suggesting effect during overlapping execution time period effect Eg]),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic part 233F.
According to such a configuration, the passage notification effect is prioritized over the notification effect, so that it is possible to give a sense of security when passing through the specific area.

[Example of setting suggestion production according to the big hit occurrence timing during the probability changing period]

After the end of the big hit game state, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the game control for controlling the probability change state is executed for a predetermined period (a period in which the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times), which period ( For example, whether a big hit occurs at the timing of the first half period and the second half period, a period up to a specific number of fluctuations (for example, 20 times), a specific period of a period divided into a plurality of three or more periods) Accordingly, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect as described above may be different, and the reliability (expectation degree) that is a high setting when the setting suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, when a big hit occurs in a relatively early period during the probability variation state period, the player feels as though he/she has lost due to the big hit even though the probability variation state period still remains for a long period. , As a privilege that a big hit occurs in a relatively early period, compared to when a big hit occurs in a relatively late period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect as described above may be increased, and the setting suggestion effect is executed. The reliability (expectation), which is a high setting, may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a loss.

On the other hand, conversely, for example, when a big hit occurs in a relatively late period during the probability variation state period, the player feels relieved by the big hit in a state where the probability variation state period does not remain much, but relatively. As a bonus that a big hit occurs in the late period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect as described above may be higher than when the big hit occurs in the relatively early period, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed. The reliability (expectation), which is a high setting, may be increased. In this way, the player can further improve the interest of the game by feeling a sense of security and an additional profit.

[Example of lamp emission pattern for setting change notification and setting confirmation notification]

In the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value has been changed, in addition to displaying the setting change notification screen and outputting the setting change notification voice, or in place of a part or all thereof, the emission control is performed by the game control microcomputer 100. Control may be performed to cause a part or all of the light emitting body such as a lamp (LED) to emit light in a specific light emitting pattern. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by light emitting bodies whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, as the setting change notification, for example, the light-emitting body provided in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, during normal game (changing, waiting (when not changing), big hit, etc.) It is also possible to control the light emission in a mode different from the above (for example, blinking display or a combination pattern that does not normally light).

In addition, in the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the set value can be confirmed, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice, or in place of part or all, the game control microcomputer 100 is used. Control may be performed in which a part or all of the light-emitting body such as a lamp (LED) whose light emission is controlled emits light in a specific light-emitting pattern. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by light emitting bodies whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, as the setting confirmation notification, for example, the light-emitting body provided in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, during a normal game (changing, waiting (when not changing), big hit, etc.) It is also possible to control the light emission in a mode different from the above (for example, blinking display or a combination pattern that does not normally light).

As described above, the light emitter controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 controls the execution of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification by the light emitter controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. It becomes possible to specify that the setting is being changed or being confirmed.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be provided with a lamp that emits light only when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Even with such a configuration, even in a pachinko gaming machine that is not equipped with an image display device, the setting lamp is being changed by a dedicated lamp provided in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Or, it becomes easy to specify that confirmation is in progress. In addition, the luminous body whose emission is controlled by the game controlling microcomputer 100 is not limited to the luminous body provided in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and other luminous body such as a lamp. May be used. When controlling to execute setting change notification and setting confirmation notification using the light emitting elements provided in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, during the special symbol variation display, the special The setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may be executed using different light emitters while the design is stopped.

In addition, by performing control to execute setting change notification and setting confirmation notification by the light-emitting body controlled by the production control CPU 120, the light-emitting body controlled by the production control CPU 120 is performing setting change or confirmation. It may be possible to specify that there is something.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 271F)
[Premise Configuration Example of Characteristic Section 271F]
Next, the characteristic portion 271F of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 271F of the present embodiment, basically, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. It is configured. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, the set value 1 has the highest payout rate, and the higher the value in the set value 1, the set value 2 and the set value 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the higher the value in the order of the set value 2 and the set value 3, the lower the advantage gradually. The set value may be provided in three or more steps. Also, the advantage may increase as the number increases.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 271F of the present embodiment, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. As an example, the jackpot winning probability is 1/99 for the set value 1, 1/150 for the set value 2, and 1/200 for the set value 3. The setting value 3 is a setting value in which the lowest winning probability of a big jackpot is set among a plurality of types of setting values, and is called a low setting. The set value 1 and the set value 2 are set values for which the jackpot winning probability and the like higher than the set value 3 for the low setting are set, and are called high setting (change setting). Note that the setting value 3 may be used as a normal setting that is basically used, and each of the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 may be used as a changed setting (high setting) changed from the normal setting.

Regarding the characteristic portion 271F, the number of rounds is 15 as the type of the big hit game state executed when the display result of the variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing becomes the specific display result (big hit display result). An example including a 15 round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as 15R jackpot) and a 5 round jackpot with 5 rounds (hereinafter referred to as 5R jackpot) will be described. The 15R jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot because the number of rounds is larger than that of the 5R jackpot and more winning balls (balls) can be expected than the 5R jackpot. In the following description, "round" may be indicated using the word "R".

The big hit game state is a specific game state that is advantageous to the player controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, the jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes the big hit display result (big bonus symbol), The open state (first state that is advantageous to the player) as the first state in which the game ball can enter (win) and the closed state (the first state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win) By opening and closing the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 as a variable winning means that can be changed to a second state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the state, a predetermined number of times such as 15 rounds and 5 rounds. This is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, in which the special winning opening is opened.

In this way, in the big hit game state, by the game control microcomputer 100, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled from the closed state (second state) to the open state (first state) like a round game. Such a predetermined game can be executed a predetermined number of times (15 times or 5 times). In the big hit game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 or FIG. 10-2, in each round game, a game can be won before the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the open state to the closed state. As a specific display capable of specifying a predetermined number of balls (upper limit value), a winning number specification display is executed in a predetermined effect mode.

For each round in the big hit game state, an upper limit value is set for the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning ball device 7, and when it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached for the winning prize number, the special winning opening is closed, Depending on the game balls that are won before it is determined that the number of prizes has reached the upper limit value, there may be cases where a prize exceeding the upper limit value occurs in each round. Such winning of a game ball that exceeds the upper limit of the number of winning prizes in each round is called an over-winning. When it is determined that an over-winning has occurred, it is possible to execute an over-winning effect, which is a specific effect related to the occurrence of an over-winning, such as notifying that an over-winning has occurred.

[Example of the first display of the winning number identification display]
FIG. 10-1 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing a first effect example of the winning number identification display in the big hit game state according to the characteristic portion 271F. The effect of the winning number identification display in the big hit game state described below is set and executed by the big hit medium effect process (S176) of FIG. 7 in the effect control CPU 120.

Although illustration is omitted, at the start of the big hit game state, the number of awardable balls, which is the total number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game state (all rounds), is set in the image display device 5 according to the type of the big hit to be started. Then, the obtainable number notification effect that is selected from a plurality of types of obtainable numbers (500, 1500) and is notified in advance (for example, the obtainable number based on the operation detection (motion detection) of the player's push button 31B) Is selected and displayed, or an effect that is not related to the player's motion detection and that selectively displays the number of specific character images that can be acquired is executed. As a result, the player can recognize the total obtainable number of balls in the big hit game state at the start of the big hit game state.

At the start of each round, such as at the start of the first R round in the jackpot gaming state, a round number image 271F001 showing the current round number as indicated by “1R” in the figure is displayed as an image as shown in (A). A relatively small size image is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the device 5, and a number-of-balls image 271F such as "TOTAL 0/1500" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. It

In the number-of-balls-out image 271F002, by displaying the character image "TOTAL", it is shown that the total number of balls out for all rounds in one big hit game state is displayed. In this example, the upper limit value of the number of prizes to the variable winning ball device 7 in each round is 10, and 10 prize balls are given to one game ball won in the special variable winning ball device 7. (Ball) is paid out. Over 10 prizes in each round are over prizes.

In the number-of-balls image 271F002, next to the character image of "TOTAL", for example, "0/1500" in (A), a number-of-balls numerical image showing the number of balls in a jackpot gaming state in the form of a fraction. Is displayed. In the numerical value image of the number of balls, the number of denominators, which is the total value of the number of balls (scheduled acquisition number) that can be acquired by the player in all rounds of the big hit game state, is displayed. Based on the numerical value of the numerator, the actual acquisition number, which is the total value of the number of balls (payout number) actually acquired by the player after the start of the big hit game state, is displayed (hereinafter, It is called the actual acquisition number display).

The obtainable number in all rounds of the 15R jackpot is, for example, 1500 (100 catches per 1R), and the obtainable number in all rounds of the 5R jackpot is 500 (100 catches per 1R), for example. In (A), a display example of the number-of-balls image 271F002 in the big hit game state of the 15R big hit is shown.

By displaying such a number-of-ball-outs image 271F002 with a numerical value in the fractional format of the number-of-acquirable-number display and the actual number-of-acquired-number display, how many balls can be acquired during the big hit this time and what is currently It is possible for the player to easily recognize whether or not he or she has won the ball.

In the number-of-balls-out image 271F002, when the over-winning occurs, the actual obtainable number increases more than the predetermined obtainable number, but the obtainable number notification effect indicates the obtainable number in advance at the start of the jackpot gaming state. Since it has been notified, the numerical value of the obtainable number display displayed in the denominator of the number-of-balls image 271F002 will be changed by the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning based on the occurrence of the over-winning (for example, Considering the case where “1500” is changed to “1510”), the player may feel a sense of discomfort in relation to the obtainable number notification effect. Therefore, in order to prevent such a feeling of strangeness in the number-of-balls image 271F002, even if an over-winning occurs, the number-of-balls image 271F002 as shown in FIGS. 10-1(C) and 10-2(C). The display of the number of possible acquisitions of is fixed and is not changed.

In each round in the big hit game state, a plurality of winning display box images 271F003 imitating a box with a lid are horizontally displayed in the lower area of the image display device 5 as in (A). The winning display box image 271F003 is an image capable of showing the number of winning prizes (upper limit value of winning prizes) in each round by the number of displayed images.

At the start of each round of the big hit game state, as in (A), the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed is, for example, the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes in each round such as 10 (the number of winning prizes). ) Minutes are displayed. Then, in each round, each time the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected, the winning display box image 271F003 is opened and the star-shaped winning is specified as shown in (B). The prize notification effect is changed to change the display mode to release the image 271F004. As a result, the player can recognize how many game balls have won the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round.

In each round, when there is no over-winning, as shown in (C), at the end of the round, an image in which the lids of all the prize-winning display box images 271F003 are opened and horizontally arranged is displayed for a predetermined period. After executing, the effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003 and ending the winning display box images 271F003 is executed. After that, at the start of the next round, the effect of newly causing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed to appear for the next round as in (A) is executed.

On the other hand, when there is an over-winning in each round, as shown in (D), at the end of the round, all of the winning display box image 271F003 is displayed along with the display of the exploding image, and the broken line arrow in the figure. After the scatter effect is executed as described above, the effect of terminating the display of the prize display box image 271F003 by deleting all the scattered prize display box images 271F003 is executed. After that, at the start of the next round, the effect of newly causing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed to appear for the next round as in (A) is executed.

In this way, in the first effect example of the prize number identification display, the prize display box image 271F003 is displayed in different display modes depending on whether the over prize is generated or not in each round. Can be terminated.

[Second effect example of the winning number identification display]
FIG. 10-2 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing a second effect example of the winning number identification display in the big hit game state according to the characteristic part 271F. The effect of the winning number identification display in the big hit game state described below is set and executed by the big hit mid effect processing (S176) of FIG. 7 in the effect control CPU 120.

The effect of the winning number identification display in the big hit game state shown in FIG. 10-2 is different from the effect of FIG. 10-1 in that the character image 271F005 is not displayed without over-winning shown in FIG. 10-2(C). After different effects are executed, such as the effect at the end of the round and the effect at the end of the round in which the character image 271F005 with over-winning is displayed as shown in FIG. That is, the display of the winning display box image 271F003 ends.

In each round, when there is no over-winning, as in (C), at the end of the round, an image in which the lids of all the winning display box images 271F003 in the side-by-side state are displayed for a predetermined period is displayed. After executing, the effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003 and ending the winning display box images 271F003 is executed. After that, at the start of the next round, the effect of newly causing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed to appear for the next round as in (A) is executed.

On the other hand, when there is an over-winning in each round, a predetermined character image 271F005 appears at the left end portion of the display area of the image display device 5 at the end of the round, as shown in (D), and thereafter, The display area is displayed to move from the left side to the right side as shown by the direction of the dashed arrow in the figure, and during the movement, all of the winning display box images 271F003 collide with all of the winning display box images 271F003. Is executed as indicated by the broken line arrow in the figure, and then the effect of ending the display of the prize display box image 271F003 is executed by deleting all the discharged prize display box images 271F003. It After that, at the start of the next round, the effect of newly causing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed to appear for the next round as in (A) is executed.

In this way, in the second effect example of the winning number identification display, after the different effects are executed in each round depending on whether the over-winning is not generated and the over-winning is generated, the winning display box image is displayed. The display of 271F003 is ended.

[Effects Obtained by First and Second Performance Examples of Winning Number Specific Display]
[1] In the first effect example of the prize number identification display, the display of the prize display box image 271F003 ends in each display mode in different display modes depending on whether the over-winning has occurred or not. Since the variation of the effects related to the round game is abundant, the interest in the effects related to the round game can be improved and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[2] In the second effect example in which the winning number identification display is performed, in each round, after different effects are performed depending on whether an over-winning has occurred or not, an award-winning display box image 271F003. Since the display of is finished, there are a lot of variations of the effects regarding the round game, so that the interest of the effects regarding the round game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

[3] In the first effect example and the second effect example of the winning number identification display, as shown in FIG. 10-1(C) and FIG. 10-2(C), the number of wins that can be obtained according to the jackpot type Even when an over-win occurs, the acquisition of the number-of-balls image 271F002 is performed in consideration of the relationship with the available-number notification effect that is performed in advance, when the number of available games is displayed with the denominator of the number-of-balls image 271F002. Possible display is fixedly displayed. However, it is considered that there are some players who have a disbelief about the acquisition of the game balls due to the over-winning unless the display of the number of possible wins changes when the over-winning occurs. On the other hand, when an over-winning is generated, instead of changing the display of the number of possible acquisitions, the cases where the over-winning does not occur and the cases where the over-winning occurs are shown in FIGS. The display of the winning prize display box image 271F003 is ended in a different manner as described above, or the display of the winning prize display box image 271F003 is performed after performing different effects as shown in FIGS. 10-2 (C) and (D). When the over-winning occurs, the production using the display of the winning display box image 271F003 is executed by ending the game, so that the display of the number of possible wins does not change for the player when the over-winning occurs. You can avoid distrust of things.

[4] In the first production example and the second production example of the winning number identification display, the prize display is displayed every time the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIGS. 10-1(B) and 10-2(B). The box image 271F003 is changed to a display mode in which the lid is opened and the star-shaped winning specific image 271F004 is released, so that the variation of the effects regarding the round game is abundant, and thus the interest of the game is improved. Can be made.

[Example of display image of prize-winning display box that varies depending on the type of jackpot]
Next, an example will be described in which the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control for changing the type of the image of the winning display box image 271F003 displayed in each round depending on the type of jackpot. The effects shown below are set and executed by the big hit mid effect processing (S176) of FIG. 7 in the effect control CPU 120.

The prize display box image 271F003 shown in FIG. 10-1 and FIG. 10-2 shows the prize display box image 271F003 having one type of shape regardless of the type of the big hit, but as described below, You may perform effect control which changes the kind of image of the prize-winning display box image 271F003 displayed in each round depending on the kind of big hit.

FIG. 10-3 is a diagram showing a jackpot type winning prize display box selection table in a table format. The jackpot display box selection table for each type is stored in the ROM 121 on the effect control side. The prize display box image 271F003 shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 is provided with a plurality of types of images such as a treasure box-shaped image and a paper box-shaped image that can be selected according to the type of jackpot. ing.

In FIG. 10C, the winning display box image 271F003 is set such that a paper box-shaped image is selected when the jackpot type is 5R and a treasure box-shaped image is selected when the jackpot type is 15R. .. In the jackpot display box image 271F003 that can be selected in this manner, the jackpot type according to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 10-3 is confirmed in the jackpot medium performance process (S176) of FIG. After the type of the winning display box image corresponding to the type of jackpot is selected and determined using the display box selection table, the winning display box images of the determined type are displayed as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. Is displayed. Then, according to the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 is executed.

In this way, for the prize display box image 271F003 displayed in each round of the big hit game state, a treasure box-shaped image is selected in the case of 15R big hit, and a paper box-shaped image is selected in the case of 5R big hit. , By performing the effect control that makes the display mode of the prize display box image 271F003 different according to the type of the big hit game state, a variety of effects related to the round game can be abundant, so that the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

[Demonstration example in which the finish mode of the prize display box image display changes depending on the number of over-winning prizes]
Next, an example of an effect in which the finish mode of the prize display box image display differs depending on the number of over-winning prizes will be described. The effects shown below are set and executed by the big hit mid effect processing (S176) of FIG. 7 in the effect control CPU 120.

In the example of the winning display box image display effect described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-3, the same ending mode of the winning display box image display may be executed regardless of the number of over-winning prizes. As shown in, an effect in which the finish mode of the prize display box image display may be executed may be executed according to the number of over-winning prizes. Such an effect is executed based on the determination as to whether or not an over-winning has occurred and counting the number of times the over-winning has occurred in the big hit midway effect process (S176).

As an effect in which the finish mode of the prize display box image display differs depending on the number of over-winnings, the number of occurrences of over-winnings (the number of over-winnings) in each round is counted, and when the over-winning is one, the first color (For example, brown) winning display box image 271F003 is scattered (example of FIG. 10-1) or released (example of FIG. 10-2) to end the display of winning display box image 271F003, and the over-winning is performed twice. Then, the winning display box image 271F003 of the second color (for example, blue) different from the first color is scattered (example of FIG. 10-1) or released (example of FIG. 10-2). The display mode before the end of the prize display box image display may be changed in accordance with the number of over-winning prizes such as an effect of ending the display.

As an effect in which the finish mode of the prize display box image display is different according to the number of over-winning prizes, each time the number of over-winning prizes in each round is different (every time it is increased), the winning display box image is displayed in a different color. After displaying and operating 271F003, the display may be terminated, and the winning display box image is displayed in a different color each time the number of over-winning prizes in each round is different a plurality of times (for example, when the number of over-winning prizes is increased a plurality of times such as 2 times). After displaying and operating 271F003, the display may be terminated.

Further, as the effect in which the finish mode of the prize display box image display differs depending on the number of over-wins, the finish mode of the prize display box image display varies according to the number of over-wins in each round as described above. In addition to executing, or without performing the effect of changing the ending mode of the prize display box image display according to the number of over-prize in each round, the number of occurrence of over-prize in all rounds of jackpot gaming state The total number of (over-winning prize number) is counted, and depending on the total number of times, in the final round of the big hit game state, the ending mode of the prize display box image display differs depending on the total number of over-winning prizes in all rounds. You may also direct.

Specifically, for example, in the final round of the big hit game state, when the total number of over-winning prizes in all the rounds is 1 to 5, the winning display box image 271F003 of the first color (for example, brown) is scattered (FIG. 10- 1) or release (example of FIG. 10-2)) to end the display of the prize display box image 271F003, and when the over-winning is 5 times or more, the second color different from the first color in the final round. In all rounds, for example, the winning display box image 271F003 (blue) is scattered (example of FIG. 10-1) or released (example of FIG. 10-2) to finish the display of the winning display box image 271F003. Depending on the total number of over-winning prizes, the display mode before the end of the prize-winning display box image display in the final round may be changed.

[Example of setting suggestion effect using image display of winning display box]
Next, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting values of the winning probability of the big hit and the small hit can be set differently like the above-mentioned setting value 1 to the setting value 3, the above-mentioned winning display box image 271F003 is displayed. An example will be described in which a setting suggestion effect that indicates to the player what setting value is used can be executed.

For example, an advantageous big hit (for example, 15R big hit) and an unfavorable big hit (for example, 5R big hit) are provided, and the prize box image 271F003 is displayed in each round regardless of which big hit, and there are a plurality of kinds of prize box images 271F003. There is a type, and control is performed to display the winning box image 271F003 of the type selected by lottery. In that case, the setting may be suggested by changing the selection ratio of the type of the prize box image 271F003 displayed in each round of each jackpot. In particular, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the case of a disadvantageous big hit, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the disadvantageous big hit is controlled by executing the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in the case of white, red, and gold as the types of boxes of the prize box image 271F003, the selection rate at which the gold treasure box is displayed becomes higher as the set value is more advantageous to the player. May be. In this case, all the prize box images 271F003 may be displayed in the same color for each round, or each of the prize box images 271F003 may be displayed in a different color (for example, as a type of the prize box images 271F003 in one round, white is used). And red and gold are mixed). When they are displayed in different colors one by one, it may be determined that, for example, if there is a round in which all are displayed in gold, it is equal to or greater than a specific set value that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the prize box image 271F003 opens the lid each time the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected, but when the lid opens like that, the special variable winning ball device Each time a game ball winning in 7 is detected, a plurality of types of items (for example, a character icon, a symbol, etc.) may appear in the box and may not appear. When the lid opens and an item appears, setting suggestion that can suggest a setting value to the player may be performed according to the type of the item that appears.

For example, as the type of item, if the item A (first item) appears, it is highly likely that the setting is advantageous for the player, and if the item B (second item) is, the specific type The effect set so that the ratio of the set value (for example, odd number setting, even number setting, etc.) may be increased may be executed.

In addition to suggesting the set value, when the item C (third item) appears, it becomes a big hit again in the held storage information that exists after the end of this big hit (so-called inside the hold). You may make it perform the suggestion production|presentation which suggests that the rate of a continuous holiday resort becomes high (intra-reservation-village suggestion production). As a method of determining whether or not to make such an item appear, it may be determined at the start of the round, or all at the start of the jackpot.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when a disadvantageous big hit (for example, 5R big hit) and a disadvantageous big hit, or the above setting is performed only when an advantageous big hit (for example, 15R big hit) occurs. You may make it perform suggestive production.

[Modification of Characteristic Section 271F]
[1] The image capable of displaying the number of winning prizes in each round is not limited to the winning display box image 271F003 shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, and a specific character image corresponding to the number of winning prizes is displayed. Other images may be used, for example.

[2] As a prize notification effect that changes the display mode of the prize display box image 271F003 each time a prize of a game ball is detected in each round, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, for example, An effect of changing any display mode, such as changing the image of the winning display box 271F003 from the image of color display to the image of monochrome display, may be provided.

[3] As an example of the first effect of the winning number identification display as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, when there is no over-winning, the image of the state where all the boxes of the winning display box image 271F003 are opened and arranged side by side Is displayed for a predetermined period of time, all winning display box images 271F003 are deleted as they are, and when there is an over-winning, all winning display box images 271F003 are enlarged and displayed on the spot to show that an over-winning has occurred. As long as the display of the winning display box image 271F003 is ended in a different display mode between when there is no over-winning and when there is over-winning, such as deletion, any effect may be produced.

[4] As a second effect example of the winning number identification display as shown in FIG. 10-2, for example, when there is no over-winning, an image in which the lids of all boxes of the winning display box image 271F003 are opened and arranged side by side After executing the effect that is displayed for a predetermined period of time, execute the effect that erases all the prize display box images 271F003, and if there is an over-winning, identify the image of the banner (which may be an image showing paper tape) to celebrate the over-winning After executing the effect to be displayed for a period of time, the effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003 is executed, and after the different effects are performed with and without over-winning, the winning display box image 271F003 is displayed. Any effect may be used as long as it ends.

[5] As an effect of displaying different prize display box images depending on the type of big hit as shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, the prize display box image 271F003 has the same shape for all kinds of big hits. Any display mode may be used as long as the display mode is different depending on the type of jackpot, such as the display color of the winning display box image 271F003 depending on the type of jackpot.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 pachinko game machine, 7 special variable winning ball device, 100 game control microcomputer, 120 effect control CPU, 271F003 winning display box image, 271F002 number of balls output.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A first state game media as possible enters a changeable variable Hente stage game media and a second state unenterable ability,
In the preferred state, a predetermined number of times executable variable Hensei control means a predetermined game to be controlled by the first state the friendly Hente stage from said second state,
The friendly Hente stage, the first state is a predetermined number of the specific image can be displayed a specific image display unit which allows identifying the number number of the second state and game medium that enables entering until the and, with a,
The specific image display means,
Displaying the predetermined number of specific images when the variable means is in the first state, and maintaining the display of the predetermined number of specific images until the variable means is in the second state,
When a predetermined number or less of the game media enter the variable means, the display mode of one specific image of the predetermined number of the specific images already displayed is changed to the specific mode every time the game medium enters. Let me display
When the number of game media entering the variable means exceeds the predetermined number, a specific effect is executed by using all of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode, and then the specific mode is changed to the specific mode. End the display of the predetermined number of changed specific images,
When the number of game media that have entered the variable means does not exceed the predetermined number, the display of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode is terminated without executing the specific effect , the gaming machine. .. Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of kinds of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Further comprising a setting suggestion production means capable of executing a setting suggestion production which makes a suggestion regarding the setting of the set value,
The setting suggestion producing means is responsive to the fact that the number of game media entering the varying means exceeds the predetermined number before the varying means is in the first state and is in the second state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting suggestion effect can be executed.

Images